JP6675814B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, it has been detected that a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on respective peripheral surfaces, game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “game media”) are inserted, and that a start lever is operated by a player. Detecting that a player has pressed a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of the plurality of reels, and a stop button provided for each of the plurality of reels. A stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of the drive, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits a driving force to each reel, and a signal output by a start switch and a stop switch. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the rotation of the reels and stops and rotates each reel. When the operation of the stop button is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number, and the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected. There is known a gaming machine called a pachislot that stops the rotation of a game machine.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the lottery of the ART is performed at the start of the bonus state, and when the ART is won, the continuation probability of the ART game (the probability of repeated notification) is determined by the lottery, and the notification is determined. In such a case, there is known a gaming machine that starts the ART game after the end of the bonus state and performs a continuous lottery of the ART game at the start of the ART game according to the continuation probability determined earlier (for example, And Patent Document 1).

  In the case of the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, if an ART is won at the start of the bonus state, the ART game can be started immediately after the end of the bonus state, so that the player can play the game even after the end of the bonus state. Can be maintained. In particular, when the continuation probability of the ART game determined at the time of winning the ART is high, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game from the expectation that the ART game will continue for a long time.

JP 2010-240017 A

  However, in the case of the above-described conventional gaming machine, in transitioning to the special gaming state advantageous to the player, regardless of which gaming state was staying immediately before the transition to the special gaming state, the special gaming state is set to the special gaming state. Since the benefits given to the player at the time of the transition are the same, there is a problem that the game development becomes monotonous and lacks the taste of the game.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problem, and when shifting to a special game state advantageous to a player, the special game is performed according to a game state immediately before shifting to the special game state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with a wide variety of game developments by changing the privilege given to a player when shifting to a state.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a symbol display means (reel display window 4) for displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a start operation detecting means (start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player. ), Symbol changing means (main CPU 93) for changing a symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, and detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means , An internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, a stop operation detecting means (stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R) for detecting a stop operation by the player; Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, And stop control means for stopping the variation of the symbols displayed on the pattern display means (Main CPU 93), as an advantageous gaming state than the normal state for the player of the game status, including the normal state, the first specific game state (the 1 (AT state), a second specific game state (second AT state) and a special game state (pseudo bonus state), and a (sub CPU 102). When the specific condition is satisfied, the special game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and when the end condition of the first specific game state is satisfied, the shift to the second specific game state is always performed. When a predetermined condition different from the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state, the process is shifted to the first specific game state, and the special game state includes the first specific game state and the first specific game state. The transition can be made when a special condition is satisfied in the second specific game state, and when the special condition is satisfied in the first specific game state and when the special condition is satisfied in the second specific game state. A different privilege (for example, AT winning, addition of the number of AT state games, etc.) can be given depending on whether the condition is satisfied, and in the second specific game state, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by the battle effect is determined. It is characterized in that result notification is performed.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a special gaming state as gaming states that are advantageous to the player, and the second specific gaming state always transitions from the first specific gaming state. In the second specific game state, whether or not to shift to the first specific game state by a battle effect is produced. In addition, it is possible to shift from the first specific game state or the second specific game state to the special game state, and a special game condition is satisfied in the first specific game state and a special game condition in the second specific game state. Benefits are different when and is satisfied. Therefore, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a variety of game developments.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the case where the gaming state control means shifts from the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state to the special gaming state, the game state control means may execute the second gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. It is characterized by shifting to one specific game state.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention changes the destination gaming state when the special gaming state ends to the first specific gaming state in accordance with the game development until the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state. The range of strategies can be expanded, and the interest in games can be further improved.

  According to the present invention, upon shifting to the special game state advantageous to the player, according to the game state immediately before shifting to the special game state, the privilege given to the player when shifting to the special game state is set. By making them different, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a wide variety of game developments.

It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. 1 is an overall perspective view showing an external structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view in the state where the middle door of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention was closed. It is a perspective view in the state where the middle door of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention was opened. It is a front view showing the internal composition of the cabinet of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the back side of the front door of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a block diagram showing the circuit composition of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a block diagram showing composition of a main control circuit of a pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a block diagram showing the composition of the sub control circuit of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table memorize | stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the internal winning combination determination table for small combination and replay stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal winning combination determination table for the bonus stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a winning combination in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a winning combination in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a winning combination in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a comparison table of an internal winning combination and a winning combination in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination stored in the main ROM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table for the general gaming state stored in the main ROM in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state stored in the main ROM in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a priority order table memorized by main ROM in a pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure showing the priority order table for MB gaming states stored in the main ROM in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the reel stop initialization table stored in the main ROM in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the pull-in priority table selection table stored in the main ROM in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the attraction priority table stored in the main ROM in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an internal winning combination storing area stored in the main RAM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a display combination storage area stored in the main RAM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area memorize | stored in the main RAM of the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the operation stop button storage area memorized by main RAM of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a pressing order storage area stored in a main RAM of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area memorize | stored in the main RAM of the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a game state flag storage area stored in the main RAM of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a pull-in priority data storage area stored in a main RAM of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an explanatory view of each sub control information controlled by the sub control circuit of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a setting change normal mode reference table stored in a ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a normal mode reference table stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are AT end normal mode reference table lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are AT end normal mode reference table lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(d) is a high-accuracy transition game number random determination table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(d) is a high-accuracy transition game number random determination table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(d) is a high-accuracy transition game number random determination table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a pseudo bonus reference table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (d) are normal-time pseudo bonus lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (e) are pseudo bonus promotion lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (e) are pseudo bonus promotion lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(e) is a pseudo bonus determination screen effect navigation lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(e) is a pseudo bonus determination screen effect navigation lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 6 is an ART reference table stored on a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an ART lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus winning during the pseudo bonus stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are pseudo lottery ART random determination tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are pseudo lottery ART random determination tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are pseudo lottery ART random determination tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is an ART navigation lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a special table lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a special mode table reference table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are pseudo bonus lottery tables during the first AT state stored on the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo AT bonus bonus lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are ART lottery tables at the time of the pseudo bonus winning in the AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) and (b) are ART lottery tables at the time of the pseudo bonus winning in the AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(g) is an ART loop lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a special continuous mode special lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an ART lottery table at the time of special condition satisfaction stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an ART lottery table at the time of execution of the pseudo bonus added state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (c) are normal time precursor game number random determination tables stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (d) are normal time precursory game number random determination tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (c) are normal time precursor game number random determination tables stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (d) are normal time precursory game number random determination tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (c) are normal time precursor game number random determination tables stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) to (d) are normal time precursory game number random determination tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the 1st AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is the first AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the 2nd AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the 2nd AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the 2nd AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the 2nd AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the 2nd AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the 2nd AT state game number lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an end effect lottery table at the time of execution of the third pseudo bonus selection effect stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the main game state in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the effect game state in the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the pachislo machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 110 is a flowchart showing power-on processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 110. 110 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. 110 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. 110 is a flowchart showing a reel stop initialization process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. 110 is a flowchart showing reel rotation start processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 110. 120 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority order storage process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119. 117 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority table selection process executed in the pull-in priority storing process shown in FIG. 116. 119 is a flowchart showing a symbol code storing process executed in the pull-in priority order storing process shown in FIG. 116 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. 120 is a flowchart showing a priority pull-in control process executed in the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119. 110 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. 110 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process by control of the main CPU which comprises the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. 124 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 123. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachislo machine concerning embodiment of this invention. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 125. 126 is a flowchart illustrating a sound control task started in the power-on processing illustrated in FIG. 125. 126 is a flowchart showing a mother task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 125. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a main task started in the mother task shown in FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task shown in FIG. 128. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 130. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an animation task started in the mother task shown in FIG. 128. 131 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination processing executed in the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 131. 140 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a start command which is executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a normal processing executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a normal processing executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 134. 135 and 136, the precursor processing shown in FIG. 138, the pseudo-bonus processing shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the pseudo-bonus end processing shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, and FIG. 145. 146, the processing during the first AT state shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the processing during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, and the processing shown in FIG. 153. It is a flowchart which shows the common process after ART random determination performed in the 2nd AT state end process shown and the pseudo bonus promotion game state process shown in FIG. 155. 147, 148, and 147, 148. FIG. 135, FIG. 136 shows the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135, 148, 147, and 148, and the precursor processing executed in the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. It is a flowchart. 135 and 136, during the precursor processing shown in FIG. 138, in the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, and in the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. It is a flowchart which shows the state transition common process at the time of the end of the precursor performed. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus transfer process executed in the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process performed in the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process performed in the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing pseudo-bonus end processing executed in the pseudo-bonus middle processing shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing pseudo-bonus end processing executed in the pseudo-bonus middle processing shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st AT state pre-start process performed in the pseudo bonus end process shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. 144. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st AT state pre-start process performed in the pseudo bonus end process shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. 144. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a first AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a first AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a process during the second AT state executed in the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a process during the second AT state executed in the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a process during the second AT state executed in the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. 134. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd AT state initial process performed in the process in the 2nd AT state shown in FIGS. 149-151. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the end of 2nd AT state performed in the process in 2nd AT state shown in FIGS. 149-151. 153 is a flowchart illustrating common processing at the time of ART termination performed in the second AT state termination processing illustrated in FIG. 153. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process executed in the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 134. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the winning operation command reception performed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 133. It is a front view which shows the special mode suggestion effect which the pachislo machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention performs during 1st AT state. It is a front view which shows the special mode notification effect which the pachislo machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention performs during 2nd AT state. It is a character combination table stored in the ROM cartridge board of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a symbol combination table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislo machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Functional flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when the player inserts a medal as a game medium and operates the start lever 23, the pachislot machine 1 has a random number within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). , One value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted.

  The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means detects the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 23 by the start switch 79 (refer to FIG. 7) (establishment of a predetermined start condition) at a predetermined probability from among the plurality of combinations. Determine the internal winning combination.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols (display combination) that is permitted to be displayed along a pay line as an effective line described later is determined. In addition, the types of the symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which a bonus such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, and bonus operation are given to a player, and other so-called “losing”. Such a thing is provided.

  Subsequently, when the player presses the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R after the rotation of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the reel stop control means (a main CPU 93 to be described later) sets the internal winning combination. Based on the timing at which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R within the specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces (frames)", and the maximum number of symbols is four symbols (maximum). Number of sliding pieces).

  However, in the MB (cassette continuous actuation device according to the second special specialty) game state, the corresponding reel is set within 75 ms which is a specified time from when at least one of the plurality of stop buttons is pressed. A control is performed to stop the rotation of.

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel stop control means displays the combination of the symbols along the winning line as much as possible using the specified time. Thus, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, for the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols is set so as not to be displayed along the pay line by using the specified time. To stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  When the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are all stopped in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the winning line is related to the winning. It determines whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether a winning combination has been achieved or not based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the winning line based on the stop of the symbol change by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the game is related to a winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player.

  A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop operation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R) performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first operation. The stop operation performed after the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, in the above-described series of flows, display of images performed by a display device such as the liquid crystal display device 11, output of light performed by various lamps (LEDs 82 and 85 described later), speakers 58 and 64, Various effects are performed using the output of sounds (sound effects, BGM, etc.) performed by the 65L and 65R, or a combination thereof.

  When the start lever 23 is operated by the player, in addition to the random number value used for determining the above-mentioned internal winning combination, other random number processing and a random number value for effect (hereinafter, random number value for effect) are extracted. Is done.

  When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means (sub CPU 102 described later) randomly determines the effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means determines whether or not there is a winning when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and when the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. The performance of the production is advanced in conjunction with each opportunity such as when it is touched.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 provides the player with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination, that is, the combination of the symbols to be aimed by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the player's interest in the game is improved.

[Pachislot structure]
The functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<External structure of pachislot>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  The pachislot machine 1 is a game machine that uses a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, a token, or the like, and a card or the like that stores information of a game value given or given to a player. However, the following description will be made assuming that medals are used.

  The exterior body 2 of the pachislot machine 1 has a cabinet 2a that accommodates reels 3L, 3C, 3R, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both sides of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a concave portion to which a hand is put when carrying the pachislot machine 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a light-transmissive sheet material mounted on a peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality (for example, 21) of symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms the upper part of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10 and executes, for example, an effect by displaying an image as an effect display by an image. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 variably displays three variable symbols as decorative symbols displayed side by side on the liquid crystal display device 11 in conjunction with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As described above, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 forms an image display unit.

  A pedestal portion 12 is formed at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal section 12 is provided with the symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the near side overlapping the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be transmitted. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the reel display window 4 displays the reel display among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. One symbol (a total of three symbols) is displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions in the frame of the window 4. That is, the reel display window 4 displays a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The reel display window 4 in the present embodiment constitutes a symbol display means.

  In the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 is formed by combining any one of predetermined three of the three regions including the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage facing each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R of the reel display window 4. A pseudo line is defined as a line (winning line) to be determined whether or not a win has occurred.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the base 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are covered by a transparent window cover 16.

  The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b. Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet placing portion 17 facing the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. A sheet member (information sheet) on which information about the game is described is arranged between the sheet placing portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps.

  The window cover 16 constituting the information sheet arrangement portion cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps. 1 can be prevented from being fraudulently accessed. The information sheet exchange will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the information display window 14 is formed as one opening continuous with the reel display window 4, but may be provided below the reel display window 4. It does not need to be continuous. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 may be formed as two openings arranged vertically.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14, and is formed in a plane facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are associated with the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are one of various devices to be operated by the player. Other devices to be operated by the player include a medal slot 21, a BET button 22, A start lever 23 is provided.

  The medal insertion slot 21 is provided for receiving a medal dropped from outside by the player. The medals accepted by the medal insertion slot 21 will be inserted in one game with a predetermined maximum number as an upper limit, and the amount exceeding the predetermined number can be deposited in the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function).

  The BET button 22 is provided for determining the number of medals deposited in the pachislot machine 1 to be inserted into one game. The start lever 23 is provided to start rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  On the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the front, a 7-segment display 24 including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided. The 7-segment display 24 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter, referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is digitally displayed.

  On both sides of the pedestal portion 12, side panel units 26L and 26R are provided. Each of the side panel units 26L and 26R has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided for drawing out medals stored inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  Below the pedestal portion 12, a waist panel unit 31 is provided. The waist panel unit 31 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating from the back side of the decorative panel.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout opening 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout exit 32 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 51 (hereinafter, also referred to as a hopper device 51) described below to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 are stored in a medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided for outputting sound such as sound effects and music according to the effect contents.

<Internal structure of pachislot>
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachislo machine 1. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 shows a state where the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

  FIG. 5 is a front view showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is a front view showing the back side of the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a has a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is provided above the inside of the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is mounted on the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via mounting brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting a sound effect.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) described later attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a medal payout count. It relays the wiring connecting the switch (not shown) and the external centralized terminal board 47.

  An external centralized terminal board 47 is provided on the right side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The external centralized terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub power supply 48 is provided on the left side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply 48 supplies power of an AC voltage of 100 V to a power supply 53 described later. Further, the power of the AC voltage of 100 V is converted into the power of the DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

  A hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are provided below the inside of the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the center of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50 or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to perform the settlement of medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from a medal payout opening 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate 20b.

  The power supply device 53 has a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 7). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when viewing the inside of the cabinet 2a from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100 V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage required in each unit, and supplies the converted power to each unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 3, 4, and 6, the middle door 41 is disposed at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and is configured to open and close the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c are provided on the upper and lower portions of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 with the reel display window 4 closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c to release the fixing of the middle door 41.

  A main control board case 55 containing a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the middle door 41. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the pachislot machine 1, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement unit 17 are exposed.

  As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17, the information sheet on which information regarding the game is described is arranged. The information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 with the middle door 41 opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 exposed. Also, in the pachislot machine 1, when exchanging the information sheet, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

  The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. The setting key type switch 56 is used to change the settings of the pachislot machine 1 or to confirm the settings of the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) housed in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a main game in the pachi-slot machine 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, determination of presence / absence of winning, and transition of a main game state (game state) described later. It is a circuit that controls the flow. That is, the main control circuit 91 controls a game state related to the progress of the game.

  Specifically, the main control circuit 91 is provided with a main CPU 93 (see FIG. 8) for executing the above-described respective controls. The internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from the combinations of the winning combinations. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes an internal winning combination determination unit.

  The main CPU 93 controls the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the detection of the start operation by the start switch 79, and rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to thereby control the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The symbol displayed on the 3R is changed. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes a symbol variation unit.

  Further, the main CPU 93 detects an internal winning combination determined as described above and a stop operation by stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R (left stop switch 80L, middle stop switch 80C, right stop switch 80R) to be described later. By stopping the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R based on the timing, the fluctuation of each symbol displayed on the reel display window 4 is stopped. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes reel stop control means.

  Further, when the fluctuation of each symbol is stopped as described above, the main CPU 93 determines a winning or non-winning of a winning based on a combination of symbols stopped on a winning line provided in the reel display window 4. Is determined. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes a winning determination unit.

  Further, the main CPU 93 determines whether the probability that the replay related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low in the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state) and the probability that the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is the general gaming state. The transition of the main gaming state between the higher RT gaming state as a higher RT gaming state and the main gaming state is controlled. The main CPU 93 performing such control constitutes a game state transition control unit.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 constitute a main control board unit. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  Above the middle door 41, a sub control board case 57 that accommodates the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7) is provided. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 forms the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The sub control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. That is, the sub-control circuit 101 controls an effect state related to the game. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later. In the following description, the effect state is also described as a sub game state.

  A center speaker 58 is provided above the sub control board case 57. A fan 59 is provided on the left side of the center speaker 58 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. That is, the fan 59 is provided at an upper portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The fan 59 blows air downward to cool the inside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub relay board 61 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 relays wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, it is a board that relays wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and a board disposed around the sub-control board 72. In addition, as a board disposed around the sub-control board 72, there are LED boards 62A and 62B described later.

  The LED boards 62A and 62B are disposed above the sub-control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. The LED boards 62A and 62B cause a LED 85 (see FIG. 7), which is a specific example of a light source, to emit light and display a blinking pattern according to the effect performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). .

  In the present embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 62A and 62B.

  Below the sub-relay board 61, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 is provided. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores the history of opening / closing of the middle door 41. When the middle door 41 is opened, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101).

  Below the middle door 41, a board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are provided. The board speaker 64 faces the waist panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2). The lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R, respectively (see FIG. 2).

  Above the lower speaker 65L, a selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are provided. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and the shape of the medals are appropriate, and guides the proper medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on a path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is disposed on the left side of the selector 66 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1 to notify the open / close of the front door 2b.

  A door relay terminal plate 68 is provided below the reel display window 4 and in a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal plate 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7), a selector 66, and a game operation display board 81 (see FIG. 7). (See FIG. 7).

  Here, examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 (described later), a start switch 79 (described later), and the like.

[Control system of pachislot]
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b.

  The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53 b of the power supply device 53. , Is connected. The external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. Here, the external centralized terminal plate 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 passes through a later-described switch through hole of the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  A power switch 53a is connected to a power substrate 53b of the power device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control board 71 includes a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80 via a door relay terminal plate 68. The game operation display board 81 and the sub relay board 61 are connected. Here, the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation). That is, the start switch 79 constitutes start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player.

  The stop switch board 80 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a circuit for displaying the reels that can be stopped using LEDs or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R corresponding to the respective stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. The stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R detect that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed by the player (stop operation). That is, the stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R constitute stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals in seven segments when receiving insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be turned, and when replaying a game. This is a substrate to be displayed on the display 24. The 7-segment display 24 and the LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 illuminates, for example, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark indicating a replay, and the like.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the sub relay board 61. The sound I / O board 84, the LED boards 62A and 62B, and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61. Here, the LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to the cabinet-side speaker 42, the center speaker 58, the board speaker 64, the lower speakers 65L and 65R, and the speakers (not shown) provided on the front door 2b. .

  Further, a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 are connected to the sub control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing images (videos) for effects, sound, LED boards 62A and 62B and other LED boards (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

[Main control circuit]
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The main control circuit 91 includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93.

  After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R with an optical sensor having a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit, and between the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit by rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with an interposed detection piece.

  Next, management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time a pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 sets the maximum number of sliding pieces to four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the reel display window 4 and each symbol within the range from the symbol to the symbol four ahead are displayed on the reel display window 4. The design can be stopped in the middle.

[Sub-control circuit]
Next, the sub control circuit 101 including the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls output of video, sound, and light in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in response to a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 generates an image (including a still image and a moving image) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on a command related to detection of a start operation by the start switch 79 among commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The effect display, which is an effect, is controlled. Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes an image display control unit.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. The control program includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting effect random number values and determining and registering effect contents (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 7) based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as an LED 85, and speakers 42, 58, and 64. , 65L, 65R, etc., includes a voice control task for controlling output of sound from speakers.

  The data storage area is a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. And a storage area for storing lamp data relating to the light on / off pattern.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 causes sounds such as BGM to be output from speakers such as speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R in accordance with sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls turning on and off of the light source such as the LED 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

[Various data tables on the main control side (main side)]
10 to 36 show various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 (see FIG. 8).

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions (symbol position data) “0” to “20” and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  The symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "20" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The pattern types are "white BAR", "red BAR", "blue BAR", "pupil pattern", "green lip", "purple lip", "blue lip", "yellow lip", "red lip". , And "Zhu Lip".

  When the reel index is detected, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 allocates the symbol located in the middle of the reel display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the reel display window 4) to the symbol position "0". , The symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation direction of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R.

  Thus, by using the middle of the reel display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle of the reel display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 indicates codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are, as described above, “white BAR”, “red BAR”, “blue BAR”, “pupil symbol”, “green lip”, “purple lip”, “blue lip”. Lip "," yellow lip "," red lip ", and" red lip ".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the symbol “white BAR” (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the symbol “symbol BAR” (symbol code 2). “0000011” is allocated as data to the symbol “blue BAR” (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for each of the "pupil symbol", "green lip", "purple lip", "blue lip", "yellow lip", "red lip", and "red lip" symbols (symbol codes 4 to 10) However, “00000100” to “00000010” are assigned as data.

<Small win / replay internal winning combination determination table>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 12, the internal winning combination (small winning combination) that allows the combination of symbols related to the payout of medals to be displayed for the small winning combination / replay data pointer, An internal winning combination (replay combination) that allows the display of a combination of symbols related to the operation of the game is associated.

  The internal winning combination is determined according to the small combination / replay data pointers “0” to “51” (however, if the small combination / replay data pointer is “0”, it is “losing”. -When the data pointer for replay is "51", the internal winning combination is "F_MB".)

  In this table, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “1”, it means that “F_Normal Lip 1” has been internally won.

  For example, as shown in a comparison table between an internal winning combination and a winning combination (see FIGS. 14 to 17) described later, “F_normal lip 1” and “C_center red BC” , "C_red ten xx", "C_red xx", "C_red xx1", "C_red xx2", and "C_center blue BC" ”,“ C_blue-ten × xxx ”,“ C_single-blue × xx ”,“ C_single-blue ××× 1 ”,“ C_single-blue ××× 2 ”, and“ C_center red different color ” BC "," C_red different color XX "," C_center blue different color BC "," C_blue different color XX "," C_pupilation ", and" C_pupilation XX " "," C_pupilary surgery xxxx1 "," C_pupilary surgery xxxx2 "," C_pupilary surgery xxx1 ", and" C_pupilography xxx2 " , “C_normal lip 1”, “C_normal lip 2”, and “C_ “Lip 3”, “C_normal lip 4”, “C_normal lip 5”, “C_normal lip 6”, “C_normal lip 7”, “C_normal lip 8”, and “C_normal lip 9” , "C_Normal Lip 10", "C_Normal Lip 11", and "C_Normal Lip 12" are internally won.

  Here, the small combination / replay data pointer “1” is a combination of duplicate winning combinations (duplicate combination). In the following description, for convenience, the internal pointer corresponding to the small combination / replay data pointer “1” is used. The winning combination is described as “F_Normal Lip 1” by the name described in the remarks column.

  Regarding the small win / replay data pointers “2” to “51”, the contents of the internal winning combinations are shown in the comparison table between the internal winning combinations and the winning combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 17. The specific description here is omitted, and similarly to the case of the small pointer / replay data pointer “1”, each is described by the name described in the remarks column of FIG.

  For example, the small winning combination / replay data pointers “2” to “4” have an internal winning combination “F_Normal Lip 2 to 4”. Here, “F_normal lip 2” is also described as an internal winning combination “BAR loss” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later. In addition, “F_normal lip 3” and “F_normal lip 4” are also described as an internal winning combination “additional BAR” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later. The above-mentioned “F_normal lip 1” is also described as an internal winning combination “BAR alignment” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In the following description, “F_normal rep 1 to 4” is also collectively referred to as normal replay. In addition, the normal replay is an internal winning combination that triggers the transition of the sub game state from the sub game state, which is the game state controlled by the sub control circuit 101, to the pseudo bonus state. Also described as a transfer role.

  The small winning combination / replay data pointers “5” to “7” have internal winning combinations “F_scroll lip 1 to 3”. Here, "F_scroll lip 1 to 3" is also described as an internal winning combination "chance replay" (special replay combination) in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small win / replay data pointer “8” has an internal winning combination of “F_Premier-Lip”. Here, “F_Premier-Alip” is also described as an internal winning combination “Premier Flag” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small win / replay data pointers “9” to “17” have an internal winning combination of “F_middle left / right bells 1 to 9”, and the small win / replay data pointers “18” to “26” have an internal win. The role is “F_center-right-left-bell 1 to 9”, and the small winning combination / replay data pointers “27” to “35” have the internal winning combination “F_right-left-center bell 1 to 9”. The data pointers "36" to "44" have internal winning combinations of "F_Right Middle Left Bell 1 to 9", and are so-called pressing order bells, and constitute a predetermined internal winning combination in the present embodiment.

  The small win / replay data pointer “45” has an internal winning combination of “F_common bell”. Here, “F_common bell” is also described as an internal winning combination “common bell” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small winning combination / replay data pointer “46” has an internal winning combination “F_weak cherry”. Here, “F_weak cherry” is also described as an internal winning combination “weak cherry” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small winning combination / replay data pointer “47” has an internal winning combination “F_strong cherry”. Here, “F_strong cherry” is also described as an internal winning combination “strong cherry” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small winning combination / replay data pointers “48” to “50” have internal winning combinations “F_chance combinations 1 to 3”. Here, “F_chance combination 1 to 3” is also described as an internal winning combination “chance chance” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small role / replay data pointers “0” to “51” are stored in the main ROM 94 as a data table. The table is composed of seven internal winning combination storage area data “0” to “6” each consisting of 1-byte data. For example, the small win / replay data pointer “0” is associated with bit 0 of the internal winning combination storage area data “0”. The small win / replay data pointer “1” is associated with bit 1 of the internal winning combination storage area data “0”. Similarly, the small win / replay data pointer “50” is associated with bit 2 of the internal winning combination storage area data “6”.

<Bonus internal winning combination determination table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 13, an internal winning combination that allows the display of a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus is associated with the bonus data pointer.

  In this table, the bonus data pointer is assigned “0” corresponding to a loss and “1” corresponding to the F_CB combination during the MB gaming state. When the bonus data pointer is “1”, it means that “F_MB” has been internally won. This “F_MB” is a so-called predetermined bonus combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and winning combination>
FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning combinations formed in each internal winning combination.

  In FIGS. 14 to 17, the internal winning combination in which “」 ”is described is a winning combination that may be established in each internal winning combination. For example, when the internal winning combination is “F_Normal Lip 1”, “C” is described as “C_Single White × XX”, “C_Center Red BC”, “C_Red Ten × XXX”, “ "C_Mono Red XX", "C_Mono Red XX", "C_Mono XX", "C_Center Blue BC", "C_Blue Ten XX", "C_Mono XX" ○ ”,“ C_single blue ××× 1 ”,“ C_single blue ××× 2 ”,“ C_center red different color BC ”,“ C_red different color ×× ○ ”,“ C_center blue different color BC ”,“ “C_blue different color ×× 10”, “C_pupilography ×× 1”, “C_pupilx × 10”, “C_pupil ×× 2”, “C_pupil” Surgery xx1 "," C_pupil surgery xx2 "," C_Normal Lip 1 "," C_Normal Lip 2 "," C_Normal Lip 3 "," C_Normal Lip 4 "," C_Normal " Lip 5 "," C_Normal Lip 6 "," C One of “Normal lip 7”, “C_Normal lip 8”, “C_Normal lip 9”, “C_Normal lip 10”, “C_Normal lip 11”, and “C_Normal lip 12” is established as a winning combination. Has the potential.

<Symbol combination table for internal winning combination>
FIG. 18 to FIG. 21 are internal winning combination symbol combination tables showing the relationship between the combinations (combinations) of the symbols that each internal winning combination wins and the number of medals paid out when each internal winning combination wins.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the combinations of the symbols that each internal winning combination wins are stored in the main ROM 94 as a data table. The table is composed of 26-byte data (storage area type) “0” to “25” each consisting of 1-byte data.

  18 to 21, a combination means a symbol combination (winning combination) of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. . The names of the winning combinations are derived from the combination.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “F_Normal Lip 1” and the “green lip-blue lip-white BAR” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle of the left reel 3L. Since “white BAR” is displayed only in the middle section of the right reel 3R except for the middle section of the middle reel 3C, “C_single white ×××” is displayed. The winning combination “C_Single White × XX” is associated with bit 6 of the data (storage area type) “1”.

  When "red BAR-red BAR-red BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "red BAR" displayed in the middle of each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Accordingly, "C_center red BC" is obtained. The winning combination “C_center red BC” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “1”.

  When "green lip-red BAR-red BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Since “red BAR” is displayed in each of the middle tier, “C_red TEN ××” is displayed. The winning combination “C_red ten × xxx” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  When "green lip-blue lip-red BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the right reel 3R excluding the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C. "Red BAR" is displayed only in the middle row of the table, thereby indicating "C_Single Red XX". The winning combination “C_red-red × xxx” is associated with bit 4 of the data (storage area type) “2”.

  When "green lip-red BAR-yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R excluding the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the right reel 3C. "Red BAR" is displayed only in the middle row, so that "C_Single Red x O x 1" is displayed. The winning combination “C_mono-red ××× 1” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  When "green lip-red BAR-red lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R excluding the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the right reel 3C. By displaying “red BAR” only in the middle row, “C_single red ××× 2” is distinguished from “C_red single ××× 1” described above. The winning combination “C_mono-red ××× 2” is associated with bit 2 of the data (storage area type) “2”.

  When "blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "blue BAR" displayed in the middle of each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Accordingly, “C_center blue BC” is obtained. The winning combination “C_center blue BC” is associated with bit 1 of the data (storage area type) “2”.

  When "green lip-blue BAR-blue BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Since “blue BAR” is displayed in each of the middle tiers, “C_blue TEN × ○” is displayed. The winning combination “C_blueten × xxx” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  When "green lip-blue lip-blue BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the right reel 3R excluding the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C. "Blue BAR" is displayed only in the middle row of the table, so that "C_single blue XX" is displayed. The winning combination “C_single blue XX” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  When "green lip-blue BAR-yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R excluding the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the right reel 3C. "Blue BAR" is displayed only in the middle row of the table, thereby indicating "C_single blue x x 1". The winning combination “C_single blue ××× 1” is associated with bit 1 of the data (storage area type) “3”.

  When "green lip-blue BAR-red lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R except for the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the right reel 3C. By displaying “blue BAR” only in the middle row, “C_single blue ××× 2” is distinguished from the above “C_single blue ××× 1”. This winning combination “C_single blue ××× 2” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  When "red BAR-red BAR-blue BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "red BAR" in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_center red different color BC” is set based on “red BAR”. The winning combination “C_center red different color BC” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  When "green lip-red BAR-blue BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "red BAR" in the middle of the middle reel 3C except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Is displayed, and “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_red different color ten × XX” is based on “red BAR”. The winning combination “C_red different color ten × xxx” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  When "blue BAR-blue BAR-red BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "blue BAR" in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C. Is displayed and “Red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_center blue different color BC” is set based on “Blue BAR”. The winning combination “C_center blue different color BC” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  When "green lip-blue BAR-red BAR" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "blue BAR" in the middle of the middle reel 3C except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Is displayed, and “Red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_blue different color ten × XX” is set based on “Blue BAR”. The winning combination “C_blue different color ××” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  When "red BAR-pupil symbol-pupil symbol" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "red BAR" in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C The “pupil design” is displayed on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R, respectively, so that “C_pupilation” is performed based on the “pupil design”. The winning combination “C_pupilation” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  When "red BAR-yellow lip-pupil symbol" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "red BAR" in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C By displaying “Yellow Lip” in the middle and “pupil design” in the middle of the right reel 3R, “C_pupilary surgery XX” is set based on the “pupil design”. The winning combination “C_pupilary surgery xxx” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  When "green lip-pupil symbol-pupil symbol" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C The “pupil design” is displayed on the middle tier and the middle tier of the right reel 3R, respectively, so that “C_pupilary art ×× 1” is set based on the “pupil design”. The winning combination “C_pupilary art ×× 1” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  When "red lip-pupil symbol-pupil symbol" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "red lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C The “pupil pattern” is displayed on the middle row and the middle section of the right reel 3R, respectively, so that the “C_pupilogram pattern” is distinguished from the “C_pupilogram ×× 1” based on the “pupil pattern” × ○○ 2 ”. The winning combination “C_pupilary art ×× 2” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  When "green lip-blue lip-pupil symbol" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C By displaying “blue lip” in the middle and “pupil design” in the middle of the right reel 3R, “C_pupilary single ×× 1” is set based on the “pupil design”. This winning combination “C_pupilary single xxx1” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  When the “red lip-blue lip-pupil symbol” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “red lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C By displaying "blue lip" in the middle and "pupil design" in the middle of the right reel 3R, the "pupil design" is distinguished from the above-mentioned "C_pupilary single xx1" based on the "pupil design". , "C_pupil surgery single XX2". The winning combination “C_pupilary single XX2” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  When "blue lip-green lip-yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "blue lip" displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C "Green lip" is displayed in the middle and "yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby indicating "C_normal lip 1". This winning combination “C_normal lip 1” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  When “blue lip-green lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “blue lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C "Green lip" is displayed in the middle and "red lip" is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that "C_normal lip 2" is obtained. The winning combination “C_normal lip 2” is associated with bit 1 of the data (storage area type) “6”.

  When “blue lip-blue lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “blue lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C. Is displayed, and "Yellow Lip" is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby indicating "C_Normal Lip 3". The winning combination “C_normal lip 3” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  When “blue lip-blue lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “blue lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and "Chu-Rip" is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby indicating "C_Normal Lip 4". The winning combination “C_normal lip 4” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-green lip-yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C. Is displayed, and “Yellow Lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 3R, thereby indicating “C_Normal Lip 5”. This winning combination “C_normal lip 5” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-green lip-red lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “red lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby indicating “C_normal lip 6”. This winning combination “C_normal lip 6” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-red lip-yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “C_normal lip 7” is displayed by displaying “red lip” in the middle and “yellow lip” in the middle of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 7” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-red lip-red lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “C_normal lip 8” is displayed by displaying “red lip” in the middle and “red lip” in the middle of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 8” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-red lip-yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “C_normal lip 9” is displayed by displaying “red lip” in the middle and “yellow lip” in the middle of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 9” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-red lip-red lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C By displaying “red lip” on the middle tier and the middle tier of the right reel 3R, respectively, “C_normal lip 10” is obtained. The winning combination “C_normal lip 10” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-purple lip-yellow lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “C_normal lip 11” is displayed by displaying “purple lip” in the middle and “yellow lip” in the middle of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 11” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  When "green lip-purple lip-red lip" is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is "green lip" displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C “C_normal lip 12” is displayed by displaying “purple lip” in the middle and “red lip” in the middle of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 12” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “8”.

  18 to 21 define the number of medals to be paid out when each internal winning combination wins.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the combination of the internal winning combination relating to the replaying combination is bit 7 to bit 0 of data “0”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “1”, and data “2”. Bit 7 to bit 0 of data “3”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “4”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “5”, and bit of data “6” Bit 7 to bit 0 of data “7” and bit 7 of data “8” are stored.

  In the internal winning combination relating to the re-gaming combination, the payout number of medals at the time of winning is 0, but when the internal winning combination relating to the re-gaming combination is awarded, the game can be executed again without inserting a medal. it can.

  Bit 6 to bit 0 of data “8”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “9”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “10”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “11”, and data “ 12, bit 7 to bit 0 of data "13", bit 7 to bit 0 of data "14", bit 7 to bit 0 of data "15", and data "16" Bit 7 to bit 0 of data “17”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “18”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “19”, and bit of data “20” 7 to bit 0, bit 7 to bit 0 of data "21", bit 7 to bit 0 of data "22", bit 7 to bit 0 of data "23", and bit 7 to bit 0 of data "24" Bit 0 and bit 7 of data “25” And bits 5, the internal winning combination of the combination of medals payout is executed, and the payout number of medals at winning each internal winning are correlated.

  Here, in each internal winning combination in which the payout of medals is executed, when two medals are multiplied, two medals are paid out in each case. Therefore, in the following description, a case where three medals are hung will be described.

  Bits 0 of data “10” and bit 7 of data “11” have a winning combination “C_BELL 1” and “C_BELL 2” as payouts of eight medals at the time of winning, as internal winning combinations. Are associated with each other.

  Bit 6 to bit 0 of the data “8” and bit 7 to bit 1 of the data “9” have a winning combination “C_” as an internal winning combination in which two medals are paid out at the time of winning. Normal cherries 1 to 14 "are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of the data “9” and bits 7 to 1 of the data “10” include “C_Chance Cherry 1”, which is a winning combination in which two medals are paid out at the time of winning, as an internal winning combination. To 8 ”are associated with each other.

  Bits 6 to 0 of the data “11” include, as internal winning combinations, “C_Chance role A1”, “C_Chance role A2”, “C_Chance role” which are payouts in which one medal is paid out upon winning. Chance combination B1 ”,“ C_chance combination B2 ”,“ C_chance combination C1 ”, and“ C_chance combination C2 ”are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “11”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “12”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “13”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “14”, and bit 7 of data “15” Bits 7 to 0 and bits 7 to 5 of the data “16” have a winning combination “C_left special × AA1” which is a winning combination in which one medal is paid out at the time of winning as an internal winning combination. 4 "," C_left special x AB1-4 "," C_left special x AC1-4 "," C_left special x BA1-4 "," C_left special x BB1-4 "," C_left special x BC1 " 4, “C_left special × CA1 to 4”, “C_left special × CB1 to 4”, and “C_left special × CC1 to 4” are associated with each other.

  Bit 4 to bit 0 of data “16”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “17”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “18”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “19”, and data “ Bits 7 to 1 of “20” include “C_medium special A × A1 to 4” and “C_medium special A” which are winning combinations in which one medal is paid out at the time of winning as an internal winning combination. × B1-4 ”,“ C_Special A × C1-4 ”,“ C_Special B × A1-4 ”,“ C_Special B × B1-4 ”,“ C_Special B × C1-4 ”, “C_medium special C × A1 to 4”, “C_medium special C × B1 to 4”, and “C_medium special C × C1 to 4” are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “20”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “21”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “22”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “23”, and bit 7 of data “24” Bit 7 to bit 1 and bit 7 to bit 5 of data “25” have a winning combination “C_Right special AA × 1” which is a winning combination in which one medal is paid out at the time of winning as an internal winning combination. ４4 ”,“ C_right special AB × 1 to 4 ”,“ C_right special AC × 1 to 4 ”,“ C_right special BA × 1 to 4 ”,“ C_right special BB × 1 to 4 ”,“ C_ “Right special BC × 1 to 4”, “C_right special CA × 1 to 4”, “C_right special CB × 1 to 4”, and “C_right special CC × 1 to 4” are associated with each other.

  Here, the names of the special roles (C_left special..., C_middle special..., C_right special...) Depend on which of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R the first stop operation was performed. It is derived. For example, when the winning combination is “C_left special × AA1” (see bit 0 of data “11”), the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, and the “blue lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. -Red BAR-Red BAR "is displayed. If the winning combination is “C_medium special A × A1” (see bit 4 of data “16”), the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and the “red” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. The player wins when "BAR-yellow lip-red BAR" is displayed. When the winning combination is “C_right special AA × 1” (see bit 0 of data “20”), the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R, and “red” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. The player wins when "BAR-red BAR-blue lip" is displayed.

  The winning combination "C_bell 1" is a so-called eight-bell combination, and is established by displaying "green lip-yellow lip-blue lip" in the middle of the reel display window 4 (see bit 0 of data "10"). ) And eight medals are paid out.

  The winning combination “C_bell 2” is a so-called eight-page bell combination, and is established by displaying “blue lip-blue lip-blue lip” in the middle of the reel display window 4 (see bit 7 of data “11”). ) And eight medals are paid out. Here, the eight-bell role of the winning combination "C_Bell1, 2" constitutes a role having a predetermined symbol combination in the present embodiment.

  "C_Normal Cherry 1 (Red BAR-Blue Rip-Yellow Rip)", "C_Normal Cherry 2 (Red BAR-Blue Rip-Zhu Rip)", "C_Normal Cherry 3 (Blue BAR-Blue Rip-Yellow)" Lip) "," C_normal cherry 4 (blue BAR-blue lip-red lip) "," C_normal cherry 5 (white BAR-blue lip-yellow lip) "," C_normal cherry 6 (white BAR-blue lip- "C_Normal Cherry 7 (green lip-blue lip-yellow lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 8 (green lip-blue lip-red lip)", "C_Normal cherry 9 (red lip-blue lip)" -Yellow lip) "," C_normal cherry 10 (red lip-blue lip-red lip) "," C_normal cherry 11 (red lip-blue lip-yellow lip) "," C_ normal cherry 12 (red lip-blue) Lip-Zhu Lip) "," C_Normal Cherry 13 (Purple Lip-Blue Lip-) Descriptor) ", and" C_ usually cherry 14 (purple descriptor - Blue descriptor - Zhu descriptor) "are both two medals are paid out.

  Each winning combination "C_Chance Cherry 1 (red BAR-yellow lip-yellow lip)", "C_Chance Cherry 2 (red BAR-yellow lip-zhu lip)", "C_Chance Cherry 3 (blue BAR-yellow lip-yellow)" Lip) "," C_Chance Cherry 4 (blue BAR-yellow lip-red lip) "," C_Chance Cherry 5 (white BAR-yellow lip-yellow lip) "," C_Chance Cherry 6 (white BAR-yellow lip- Zhu Lip), "C_Chance Cherry 7 (green lip-yellow lip-yellow lip)", and "C_Chance Cherry 8 (green lip-yellow lip-yellow lip)" all receive two medals. You.

  Each winning combination "C_chance role A1 (blue lip-yellow lip-red BAR)", "C_chance role A2 (blue lip-yellow lip-red lip)", "C_chance role B1 (blue lip-yellow lip-blue) BAR) "," C_chance role B2 (blue lip-yellow lip-green lip) "," C_chance role C1 (blue lip-yellow lip-white BAR) ", and" C_chance role C2 (blue lip-yellow lip) " -Purple lip) "is a so-called chance role, and one medal is paid out.

<Internal lottery table for general game state>
In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 22, the lottery value and the data pointer for each set value are associated with the winning number when the main gaming state is the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). .

  In the present embodiment, a random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0-65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the subtraction result is negative (Ie, whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred), an internal lottery is performed.

  Therefore, the larger the value specified as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which the value is assigned is determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  Here, when the number of times of the process of determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of the winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process is determined to be “losing”.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of a lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, and is determined by the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12). Is the data for specifying.

  That is, the data pointer is data used for determining the storage area type and the 1-byte data in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 12 and the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. is there. As the data pointer, a small combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of a plurality of winning numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, for some lottery values among the winning numbers “1” to “51”, the setting value “6” is larger than the setting value “1”. It is set high. For example, regarding the winning numbers “5”, “6”, “7”, and “45”, the lottery values of the setting value “1” are “327”, “327”, “327”, and “820”, The lottery values of the setting value “6” are “450”, “450”, “450”, and “900”.

  Except for the winning numbers “5”, “6”, “7”, and “45”, the other winning numbers are associated with common lottery values with setting values “1” to “6”.

  In the small part / replay data pointer, a value corresponding to the winning number is associated with the winning numbers “1” to “50”, and “0” is associated with the winning number “51”. Have been.

  On the other hand, regarding the bonus data pointer, “0” is associated with the winning numbers “1” to “50”, and “1” is associated with the winning number “51”. .

  In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “51” for each of the setting values “1” to “6” may be shared.

<Internal lottery table for RT1 game state>
In the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 23, the lottery value and the data pointer for each set value are associated with the winning number when the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  Since the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state is configured substantially similarly to the internal lottery table for the general game state shown in FIG. 22, the internal lottery table for the RT1 game state is different from the internal lottery table for the general game state. And the same portions as those of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state will not be described, including in the drawings.

  When the number of times of determination processing of whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery processing is determined to be “losing”, but in the present embodiment, the main gaming state is When the game is in the RT1 gaming state, the number of times of the determination process as to whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative is set so as not to exceed the number of the winning numbers.

  When the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state is a carry-over state of the bonus flag of the MB gaming state that is not activated even if the “F_MB” is won. At “6”, the lottery value of the winning number “51” corresponding to “F_MB” is set to “0”.

  Further, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, each of the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “4” is higher than each of the winning numbers “1” to “4” in the general gaming state internal lottery table. Is set. In the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “51” for each of the setting values “1” to “6” may be shared.

<Priority order table>
The priority order table shown in FIG. 24 defines the priority order of the number of sliding pieces when the main gaming state is other than the MB gaming state (non-MB gaming state). The priority order table indicates an order (hereinafter referred to as a priority order) in which an applicable numerical value is preferentially applied from a numerical value range (that is, 0 to 6) of the number-of-slide-pieces determination data which is predetermined as the number of sliding pieces. Stipulate.

<MB gaming state priority order table>
The MB gaming state priority order table shown in FIG. 25 defines the priority order of the number of sliding symbols when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state. The MB gaming state priority order table defines the priority order of numerical values that can be applied from the numerical value range (that is, 0 or 1) of the slide piece number determination data that is predetermined as the number of slide pieces.

  In the priority order table and the MB gaming state priority order table, each numerical value is searched in order from the higher order (1) to the lower order (5), and as a result of the search, the numerical value corresponding to the priority order “1” is obtained. Applied preferentially. The priority order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority order, and the number of sliding pieces having a higher priority order is applied.

  The priority order table and the MB game state priority order table in the present embodiment define the priority order based on the number-of-sliding-pieces determination data. That is, the priority order is defined such that the numerical value corresponding to the number-of-slides determination data is the highest. As a result, the number-of-slide-pieces determination data is determined with higher priority than the number of other slide pieces, so that the display of the symbol intended at the time of developing the stop table has priority.

<Reel stop initial setting table>
In the reel stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 26, pull-in priority table selection data or a pull-in priority table number and a stop table selection data group are associated with a turn stop number. These various data indicate various table numbers to be selected in the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R according to the progress of the one-unit game.

  The pull-in priority table selection data is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 27 described later. The pull-in priority table number is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table shown in FIG. 28 described later.

  Although the details of the “stop table selection data group” are omitted, a stop table or the like that stores the pressed positions of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R related to the first to third stop operations and the number of sliding symbols is stored. It is a number for selection. These numbers are data used to determine “sliding piece number determination data”, that is, to determine the positions at which the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, according to the progress of the one-unit game. .

  In the reel stop initial setting table, pull-in stop priority table selection data is associated with a turn stop number corresponding to a data pointer for which a different stop control is performed according to the stop operation order (push order). Is associated with a pull-in stop number corresponding to a data stop number corresponding to a data pointer for which stop control is performed irrespective of the order.

<Purchase priority table selection table>
In the pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 27, a pull-in priority table number corresponding to a stop operation type indicating the order of stop operations is associated with each pull-in priority table selection data.

  For example, in the pull-in priority table selection data “00”, if the first stop operation is “left”, the pull-in priority table number “00” is also associated with the second and third stop operations. When the first stop operation is “medium”, the pull-in priority table number “01” is also associated with the second and third stop operations.

  In the pull-in priority table selection data “00”, when the first stop operation is “right”, the pull-in priority table number “01” is associated. At the time of the second stop operation, when the first stop operation is “right”, the second stop operation is “left” (“right → left” in the figure), and the second stop operation is “middle”. In some cases (“right → middle” in the figure), a pull-in priority table number “01” is associated. At the time of the third stop operation, when the first stop operation is “right” and the second stop operation is “left”, and when the third stop operation is “middle” (“right → left → middle” in the figure) ), And when the first stop operation is “right” and the second stop operation is “middle”, and when the third stop operation is “left” (“right → middle → left” in the figure). Is associated with a pull-in priority table number “02”.

<Purchase priority table>
The draw-in priority table shown in FIG. 28 indicates which of the symbols is to be drawn in preferentially when there are a plurality of symbols (designs corresponding to the combination determined as the internal winning combination) that can be displayed within the range of the draw-in. Represents. In FIG. 28, the data of the winning operation flag (winning combination) is omitted for simplicity.

  In the pull-in priority table, pull-in priority data indicating the pull-in priority of the symbol combination related to the winning operation flag is shown. The draw-in priority data is information provided for the main CPU 93 to identify the draw-in priority.

  Here, "pull-in" means that the winning combination formed by the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination is displayed along the winning line within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are displayed. Stopping rotation.

  For example, in the pull-in priority table number “00”, it is determined that there is a possibility that the winning operation flag “C_left special × CC1-4” and the winning operation flag “C_medium special A × A1-4” may be won. In this case, since “C_left special × CC1-4” has a higher priority than “C_middle special A × A1-4”, “C_left special × CC1-4” is preferentially pulled in. Stop control of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
FIGS. 29 to 36 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 8).

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 29 is configured by seven storing areas of internal winning combination storing areas (storage area types) 0 to 6. The size of each of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6 is 7 bytes. In the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6, data determined based on the internal winning combination data (storage area type) defined by the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 12 is stored.

  In the illustrated internal winning combination storing area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 0 correspond to “losing”, “F_normal lip 1-4”, and “F_ scroll lip 1-3”, respectively. I have.

  Similarly, bits 0 to 2 of the internal winning combination storage area 6 respectively correspond to “F_chance combinations 1 to 3”, and bits 3 to 7 are unused.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 30 includes 26 storage areas of display combination storage areas (storage area types) 0 to 25. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 0 to 25 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the total size of the display combination storage areas 0 to 25 is 26 bytes. The display combination storage areas 0 to 25 store data determined based on winning combination data (storage area type) defined by the symbol combination tables (bonus, replay, small combination) shown in FIGS. The data in the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the winning combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storage area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the display combination storage area 0 are “C_white ten XX”, “C_white ten XX”, and “C_white ten XX”, respectively. , "C_cross white BC2", "C_cross white BC1", "C_center white BC", "C_MB2", and "C_MB1".

  Similarly, bits 5 to 7 of the display combination storage area 25 correspond to “C_right special CC × 4”, “C_right special CC × 3”, and “C_right special CC × 2”, respectively. Bit 4 is unused.

<Symbol code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 31 has the same configuration as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The symbol code storage area stores data indicating winning combinations on the spinning reel. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all winning combinations can be won, so that "1" is stored in all corresponding bits in the symbol code storage area. Thereafter, when the left reel 3L stops (the reels 3C and 3R rotate), the bit corresponding to the winning combination that cannot be won due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to “0”.

  Referring to FIGS. 18 to 21, for example, when the symbol of “red BAR” stops on the middle reel 3C, the symbol “C_normal” in which the symbol of the middle reel 3C is “green lip” or “blue lip” Bits corresponding to “Lip 1-12” and “C_normal cherry 1-14” are updated to “0”. On the other hand, bits corresponding to “C_center red BC”, “C_cross red BC1 to 4”, etc., in which the symbol of the middle reel 3C is “red BAR”, are maintained at “1”.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 32 is 1 byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R capable of detecting a stop operation by the player, that is, valid stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R was detected immediately before. In the present embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are not used and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is valid, “1” is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is valid, “1” is stored in the bit 6.

  In this embodiment, "stop button is enabled" means that a stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting a stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 33 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R. The pressing order storage area has a size of 1 byte, and bits 0 to 5 are used. Bits 6 and 7 are not used and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, if the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (ON) in bit 1, and if the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit 2 Is stored (ON), "1" is stored in bit 3 in the case of "middle → right → left", and "1" is stored in bit 4 in the case of "right → left → middle" (ON), and “1” is stored (ON) in bit 5 in the case of “right → middle → left”.

<Storage area for carryover role>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 34 is 1 byte in size. Bit 0 corresponds to “MB (F_MB)”, and bits 1 to 7 are unused. When the internal winning combination “F_MB” is determined as a result of the internal lottery process, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area.

  By storing “1” in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area, it can be determined that the state has been won for “F_MB”. The state in which “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area is held until a combination of symbols corresponding to “C_MB1, 2” is displayed on the pay line.

  That is, when the winning of “F_MB” is achieved, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area in at least one unit game until the combination of these bonus symbols is displayed on the payline as a display combination. This state is maintained. Maintaining a state in which “1” is stored in bit 0 from a unit game in which a bonus is won to a unit game in which a prize is won is called “carryover”. “F_MB” stored in the carryover combination storage area is also referred to as “carryover combination”.

  When a stop operation is performed by the player and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, the internal winning combination storage area is initialized, but the carryover combination storage area is not initialized. By doing so, the state of “carryover” can be maintained.

<Gaming state flag storage area>
The gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 35 stores a flag for indicating whether the main gaming state is the bonus gaming state or the RT1 gaming state, and is 1 byte in size.

  Bit 0 and bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area relate to the bonus gaming state, and bit 2 relates to the RT1 gaming state. In the present embodiment, bits 3 to 7 of the gaming state flag storage area are not used.

  When the main gaming state is the bonus gaming state, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1” (on) in the MB gaming state, and in the CB gaming state (winning state of the F_CB role) in the gaming state flag storage area. When bit 1 is set to “1” (ON) and the main game state is the RT1 game state, bit 2 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1” (ON).

<Purchase priority data storage area>
The pull-in priority data storage area shown in FIG. 36 includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a medium reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area.

  Note that the contents (search symbol position and pull-in priority data) of the pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel and the pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel are the same as those of the left reel. The following describes the left reel pull-in priority data storage area.

  The left reel pull-in priority data storage area can store pull-in priority data (see FIG. 28) for each of the search symbol positions (see the symbol position data in FIG. 10). For example, with respect to the symbol position data 0, the roles (one of 00EH to 000H) defined in the priorities 1 to 3 of FIG. 28 are defined. One of the pull-in priority data is stored in accordance with the stop positions of the other reels 3C and 3R. Thereby, the left reel 3L is controlled so that the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination is stopped or not stopped on the pay line.

  In the same manner, the symbol position data 1 to 20 also have respective roles defined in the priority order. Based on these pull-in priority data, the internal winning combination and the stop positions of the other reels 3L, 3C, 3R are determined. Accordingly, any one of the pull-in priority data is stored.

<Outline of gaming state controlled by sub-control side>
FIGS. 37A to 37H are diagrams illustrating control information controlled by the sub-control circuit 101. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 37A to 37H, the sub control circuit 101 includes a sub game state, a normal mode, a probability state, a pseudo bonus selection effect, an AT probability state, a special mode, and an AT mode. Each control information of the continuation type and the AT status flag is controlled.

  The sub game state shown in FIG. 37 (a) has a normal state, a precursor state, a pseudo bonus transition state, a plurality of pseudo bonus states, and a plurality of AT states, each of which is stored in the sub game state storage area. When the bit stored is stored and the bit corresponding to each sub game state becomes “1” (ON), the effect corresponding to each sub game state is executed by the sub control circuit 101.

  In the sub game state, the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area in the previous game is set to the old sub game state, and the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area in the current game is set to the new sub game state. Each of the sub game states can be set in the sub game state storage area.

  The normal state is a game state executed in any of the main game state of the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state, and is a game state selected in a normal game.

  The precursor state is a game state selected when a pseudo bonus type lottery executed at a pseudo bonus winning opportunity described later is won, and during the unit game of a predetermined number of games, an effect different from the normal state is executed. At the same time, a pseudo-bonus promotion lottery is executed in which the winning pseudo-bonus state is promoted to a pseudo-bonus state more advantageous to the player.

  The pseudo bonus transition state is a game state that is executed when a pseudo bonus type lottery executed at a later-described pseudo bonus winning opportunity is won, and a later-described pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is executed, and the pseudo bonus transition as a winning combination is performed. Until a pseudo bonus transfer combination (described later) including a symbol (described later) is won, a transitional lottery of a pseudo bonus state that is advantageous to the player and a promotion lottery (described later) of the winning pseudo bonus state are executed. This is a gaming state in which a pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation effect (described later) that allows a pseudo bonus shift symbol to be won when a role is won is performed.

  In the pseudo bonus state, one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 among the pseudo bonus types (described later) is won in a pseudo bonus type lottery executed at a pseudo bonus winning timing described later, and the pseudo bonus is determined in the pseudo bonus transition state. This is a game state to be shifted to when a screen navigation effect (described later) is executed, and includes first to sixth pseudo bonus states in which the effect contents are different from each other.

  Here, in the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus state is won in the lottery process executed for each unit game by the sub control circuit 101 during the RT1 game state, which is the high RT state, and “F_normal rep 1 to 4 ", and the sub-control circuit 101 executes a sub-control executed when one of the predetermined specific conditions that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are stopped by the player in a specific pressing order is satisfied. In the gaming state, a pseudo bonus shift symbol (described later) is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, and the sub-control circuit 101 executes an effect that simulates a so-called bonus gaming state. In the pseudo bonus state, a push order navigation (to be described later) for winning the eight-bell role is notified eight times as a predetermined number.

  The first to fifth pseudo bonus states are gaming states in which a push order navigator (described later) for notifying a push order for arranging a predetermined number of times (eight in the present embodiment) eight bells is executed. is there. In the sixth pseudo bonus state, a push order navigation (described later) for winning the eight-bell role is executed a different number of times (20 times in the present embodiment) from the first to fifth pseudo bonus states. You. The effect contents in each pseudo bonus state will be described later.

  The sub-control circuit 101 stores the pseudo bonus types 0 to 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table. Here, the pseudo bonus type stock table stores the pseudo bonus type won by the pseudo bonus type lottery at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table and the pseudo bonus type stored at the top of the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is a table set as the pseudo bonus type of the pseudo bonus state to be executed.

  Here, in the following description, the case in which the pseudo bonus type lottery is won is the case in which one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is won in the pseudo bonus type lottery.

  In addition, the pressing order navigation means that, when the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R is pressed in a predetermined pressing order, when the internal winning combination that can win a specific winning combination is won, the predetermined pressing order is notified. For example, when the predetermined pressing order is the stop button 19C, the stop button 19R, and the stop button 19L, the "middle-right-left" pressing order navigation is selected, and the player presses the predetermined pressing order. The order is announced. Further, among the push order navigations, the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role constitutes information of an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the pseudo-bonus confirmation screen effect means that when the pseudo-bonus state is won and the pseudo-bonus transition processing shown in FIG. 140 is executed, it is notified that the pseudo-bonus has been won, and the pseudo-bonus confirmation screen is displayed. This is an effect that executes a navigation effect.

  In addition, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation effect is an effect that is executed in a pseudo bonus transition state when a normal replay and a push order bell, which are pseudo bonus transitions, are internally won. In the case where the internal winning has been achieved in the normal replay, the game proceeds to the pseudo bonus state, and a push order navigation that can display a pseudo bonus transition symbol indicating the content of the transitioned pseudo bonus state to the player in the middle of the reel display window 4 is provided. At the same time, the player is notified that the pseudo bonus state is started from the next game. In addition, in the case where the inside of the pushing order bell is won, the pushing order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed according to the effect game state controlled by the main control circuit 91.

  In the AT state, in an ART lottery executed at a predetermined winning occasion including a case where the pseudo bonus type lottery is won, among the AT lottery numbers having different contents, the AT lottery number having the contents related to the AT state lottery is won. This is a sub-game state selected when a predetermined number of push-order navigations in each pseudo bonus state are executed, and is a sub-game state in which a push-order navigation for winning an eight-bell role is executed.

  By setting the sub game state to the AT state, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the main game state is the RT1 game state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is high, and the sub game state is the AT state. It becomes the ART game state. Here, the AT winning number will be described later.

  The AT state includes a first AT state as a first specific effect state, a second AT state as a second specific effect state, and a pseudo bonus promotion game state as a third specific effect state. This is a game state in which the pressing order navigation of the eight-bell role is executed, and the number of games is determined at the start of each AT state. The sub control circuit 101 is configured to shift to the first AT state when shifting from the pseudo bonus state to the AT state, and to shift to the second AT state after the first AT state ends. Thus, one set of the AT state and the first AT state constitute one set of the AT state.

  Here, in the first AT state, when the pseudo bonus state is won during the first AT state, a lottery is performed to add the number of games in the first AT state when the corresponding pseudo bonus state is executed. Is in a sub game state. In the second AT state, when the pseudo bonus state is won during the second AT state, it is notified that the AT state continuously transitions from the second AT state to the first AT state. When the second AT state ends, this is a sub game state in which a continuous effect is performed to determine whether or not to continuously shift from the second AT state to the first AT state. Here, in the second AT state, a group of characters is displayed in each of a region on the left side in the longitudinal direction and a region on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a group of characters (friends) displayed in the region on the left side in the longitudinal direction. ) And the character group (enemy) displayed in the region on the right side in the longitudinal direction are reduced from the initial display. In addition, the continuous effect means that when continuously shifting to the first AT state, at least one character of the character group (ally) is displayed in the left area in the longitudinal direction until the end of the second AT state. Subsequently, when the transition to the first AT state is not continued, at least one character of the character group (enemy) is continuously displayed in the region on the right side in the longitudinal direction until the end of the second AT state. Also, the pseudo bonus promotion game state is different from the first AT state and the second AT state, and is different from the pseudo bonus type lottery (described later) executed in the first AT state and the second AT state. This is a gaming state to be shifted to when the player wins 5 or 6. In the gaming state in which a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the corresponding pseudo bonus state is promoted to a pseudo bonus addition state more advantageous to the player. is there.

  The normal mode shown in FIG. 37B includes normal modes 1 to 5, each of which is stored in the normal mode storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table to be referred to in each lottery process according to the selected normal mode.

  In the normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery and the probability state lottery, when the normal mode 2 is selected as the normal mode, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 indicates that the normal mode 1 is selected. The winning probability of the AT winning number which is advantageous to the player is set higher than the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101. The table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the normal mode 3 is selected as the normal mode is different from the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the normal mode 2 is selected. The winning probability of the AT winning number which is advantageous for the player is set high.

  In addition, when the normal modes 4 and 5 are selected, the sub control circuit 101 is configured to always win the AT state in the normal lottery ART random lottery when the pseudo bonus type lottery is won. . Also, in the normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery and the probability state lottery, when the normal mode 5 is selected as the normal mode, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 indicates that the normal mode 4 is selected. The winning probability of the AT state, which is advantageous for the player, is set higher than the table referred to by the sub control circuit 101.

  The probability state shown in FIG. 37 (c) is composed of low accuracy, high accuracy, and super high accuracy. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table referred to in each lottery process depending on the probability state to be selected.

  In the normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery and the probability state lottery, the table referred to by the sub control circuit 101 when the high probability is selected as the probability state is the sub table when the low probability is selected. As compared with the table referred to by the control circuit 101, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state, the AT state, the probability state, and the number of precursor games, which are advantageous for the player, is set higher. Further, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the ultra-high accuracy is selected as the probability state is different from the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the high accuracy is selected. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state, the AT state, the probability state, and the number of precursor games that are advantageous to the player is set high.

  The pseudo bonus selection effect as the effect mode shown in FIG. 37 (d) is composed of first to third pseudo bonus selection effects, and each is stored in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area. The sub control circuit 101 is configured to execute the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected by the player when executing the first to fourth pseudo bonus states.

  Among the pseudo bonus selection effects, the first pseudo bonus selection effect as the first effect mode and the second pseudo bonus selection effect as the second effect mode have different effect contents and are in the AT state. The main control circuit 91 and the sub-control circuit 101 are controlled by a notification timing for executing a first AT state notification effect and a second AT state notification effect for notifying that an AT state has been won in the case of winning. This is an effect that suggests each piece of game information to the player.

  Here, the notification timing is a timing at which it is notified that the AT state has been won. If the AT state has been won, the eight sheets at the time when the AT state has been notified in the pseudo bonus state are notified. Eight notification timings 1 to 8 are set in the sub-control circuit 101 according to the remaining winning number of the bell role, and the set notification timing is stored in the notification timing counter. For example, when the notification timing is set to 8, since the number of remaining winnings of the eight-bell role is seven, 7 is stored in the notification timing counter.

  The first pseudo bonus selection effect is an effect that indicates which of the settings “1” to “6” the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91 at the notification timing. The second pseudo bonus selection effect is an effect that indicates a loop rate (described later) of the AT state that has been won based on the notification timing.

  In the third pseudo bonus selection effect as the third effect mode, the player selects the normal mode selected by the sub-control circuit 101 from the next game if the AT state has not been won at the end of the pseudo bonus state. Which of the ART lottery tables during normal medium pseudo bonus winning (see (a) to (c) in FIGS. 52 to 54) is referred to in the next normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery. It is a production that suggests.

  As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes effects that suggest different game information for each of the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected at the start of the pseudo bonus state. The range of strategies for games can be expanded. Here, the game information is each piece of control information relating to a game controlled by the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101, respectively.

  The during-AT probability state shown in FIG. 37 (e) is composed of the same color normal and the same color high accuracy, and is stored in the during-AT probability state storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table to be referred to in each lottery process according to the selected AT probability state.

  Here, the pseudo bonus lottery during the first AT state (see FIGS. 72 (a) and (b)) and the pseudo bonus lottery during the second AT state (see (a) and (b) in FIGS. 73 to 82). In), the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the same-color high-accuracy is selected as the during-AT probability state is different from the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the same-color normal is selected. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which the same color symbol can be displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect described later is set high.

  Further, in the AT state, when a normal replay is won as an internal winning combination, a replay symbol for notifying that a normal replay has been won is displayed in three symbol display areas (not shown) provided in the liquid crystal display device 11. Although displayed in one line, when the same color high accuracy is selected, the replay symbols of the same color are more easily displayed in one line than when the same color normal is selected. In addition, when the same color normal is selected, at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a line is likely to have a different color compared to the case where the same color high accuracy is selected. Here, the sub control circuit 101 notifies the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 that the normal replay has been won, not only in the AT state but also in the sub game state in the normal state. Display the symbols in a line. At this time, when the same color high accuracy is selected, replay symbols of the same color are more easily displayed in a line than when the same color normal is selected. In addition, when the same color normal is selected, at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a line is likely to have a different color compared to the case where the same color high accuracy is selected.

  For this reason, when the same color high accuracy is selected, the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 can easily display the replay symbols of the same color in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state, and Is configured so that the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which the symbol of the same color can be displayed is high, and by winning the replay symbol of the same color, it is suggested that the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which the symbol of the same color can be displayed is high. .

  When the same color normal is selected, the sub CPU 102 determines that at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state is likely to be a different color replay symbol. Is configured so that the probability of winning in the pseudo bonus state in which the symbol of the symbol pattern can be displayed is high, and at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 is a replay symbol of a different color. In addition, it is suggested that the probability of winning in the pseudo bonus state in which a different color symbol can be displayed is high. As described above, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a pseudo special game state suggesting means.

  The special mode shown in FIG. 37F includes special modes 1 to 6 and is stored in the special mode storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table referred in each lottery process depending on the special mode to be selected.

  The sub-control circuit 101 selects one of the special modes 1 to 5 based on a special mode table determined by referring to a special mode table reference table (see FIG. 61) based on a special table and special table information described later. Further, in the AT state lottery process executed at a predetermined winning opportunity, the sub-control circuit 101 switches to the other special modes 1 to 5 when an AT winning number associated with the execution of the special mode 6 is won. The special mode 6 is selected with priority. The sub control circuit 101 selects the special mode 1 as the special mode in the initial state.

  Here, the special modes 2 to 4 may be selected in an overlapping manner. For example, when the special mode 2 and the special mode 3 are selected in an overlapping manner, in the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state. The pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and (b) is referred to.

  Further, in the special mode, in a later-described pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state (refer to step S666 in FIG. 149), the sub CPU 102 determines that a transition to the pseudo bonus state is to be made to a plurality of different winning probabilities. 2 is referred to when determining which of the pseudo bonus lottery tables (see (a) and (b) in FIGS. 73 to 82) to select during the AT state.

  The AT continuation type shown in FIG. 37 (g) includes a no continuation, a continuation, and a special continuation, and is stored in the AT continuation type storage area. The AT continuation type is determined to be the AT continuation lottery executed in the first AT state start process (see FIGS. 145 and 146). Here, in the AT continuation lottery, if the AT continuation type is determined to be no continuation, the sub control circuit 101 ends the AT state without shifting to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state. On the other hand, in the AT continuation lottery, when the AT continuation type is determined to be the continuation or the special continuation, the sub control circuit 101 transitions to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state, thereby continuing the AT state.

  Further, in the AT continuation lottery, when the special continuation is determined as the AT continuation type, the sub control circuit 101 sets the AT continuation type to the continuation in the second AT state processing (see FIGS. 149 to 151). As an effect different from the determined effect, an effect of displaying a predetermined number of characters (10 in the present embodiment) in a region on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 11 is executed, and the special condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute a special effect in the case. Here, the special condition is a condition that is satisfied when the value set in a special continuous game number counter (described later) is not 0 when the second AT state ends. In addition, the special effect means that, when the special condition is satisfied, the ten characters (friends) displayed in the region on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the longitudinal direction do not decrease by one. This is an effect that suggests to the player that an AT state stock will be generated by executing an effect in which all characters (enemy) displayed in the area on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the AT are gone. This is one of a plurality of continuation notification modes for notifying the set AT continuation type.

  The AT state flag shown in FIG. 37H includes a loop lottery state, a first AT state game number lottery state, a special mode lottery state, and a first AT state effect state. Each state constituting the AT state flag is composed of three flags: a normal state flag, a first pseudo bonus during AT state flag, and a second pseudo bonus during AT state flag. Have been.

  Here, the normal flag is a flag that is selected in the initial state and when no other flags are selected. The pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is a flag selected when the pseudo bonus state is won in the first AT state. The pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state is a flag selected when the pseudo bonus state is won in the second AT state.

  The storage areas and the counters described above are provided in predetermined areas of the sub-control circuit 101, respectively.

[Various data tables on the sub-control side]
38 to 107 are various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 38 to 107, each item corresponding to the internal winning combination also corresponds to the displayed combination.

<Normal mode reference table lottery table when setting is changed>
The setting change normal mode reference table lottery table shown in FIG. 38 is a table which is referred to when the table is determined in the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 133. Note that FIG. 38 shows only the case of the setting 1 and the setting 6, but this is merely an example, and in the case of the settings 2 to 5, a predetermined probability is similarly set for each table.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the normal mode reference table lottery table at the time of setting change, the lottery probability of each table is associated with a different lottery value in the set values “1” to “6”.

<Normal mode reference table>
The normal mode reference table shown in FIG. 39 is a table which is referred to when the normal mode is determined in the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 and the common processing at the time of ART termination shown in FIG. 154. The normal mode reference table stores normal mode numbers 1 to 5 associated with the normal modes 1 to 5, respectively.

  In the normal mode reference table shown in FIG. 39, “pseudo bonus 0 to 10 times” represents the number of AT state non-wins that did not win the AT state at the time of winning the pseudo bonus type lottery, respectively. Initialized by winning the AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the normal mode number is determined from the AT state non-winning number of the pseudo bonus type lottery and the selected table. For example, after the power is turned on or after the end of the ART state, the pseudo bonus type lottery has not been won, that is, the number of times the AT state has not been won at the time of the pseudo bonus type lottery has been won, and Table A is selected as the table. In this case, since the normal mode number 1 is stored in the normal mode reference table, the normal mode is determined to be the normal mode 1.

  When the tables A to Y are selected, the normal mode reference table sets the AT state non-winning number to a specific number defined for each table (for example, 9 for table A and 9 for table W). 4), the normal mode number 4 is stored so that the normal mode 4 is determined.

  Further, when the table Z is selected, the normal mode reference table shifts to the normal mode 5 in which the player shifts to the AT state which is more advantageous to the player than when the normal mode 4 is determined, when the next pseudo bonus type lottery is won. The normal mode number 5 is stored as determined.

<AT end normal mode reference table lottery table>
The AT end normal mode reference table lottery table shown in each of (a) and (b) of FIGS. 40 and 41 is a table referred to when determining the table in the common processing at the time of ART end shown in FIG. 154. is there.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 40 and 41, in the AT end normal mode reference table lottery table, each table A to Z has a different lottery value in the previously selected table A to Z. Are associated with each other.

<High-probability transition game number lottery table>
The high-probability transition game number lottery tables shown in (a) to (d) of FIGS. 42 to 44 are used in the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 and the pseudo bonus end processing shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. It is a table referred to when determining a probability state.

  As shown in each of (a) to (d) of FIGS. 42 to 44, the number of high-probability transition game lottery tables is different depending on the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. The lottery table is configured to be selected. For example, when the normal mode is the normal mode 1 and the probability state is low, the high-probability transition game number random determination table shown in FIG. 42A is selected.

  As shown in each of (a) to (d) of FIGS. 42 to 44, in each high-probability transition game number lottery table, each probability state and the number of games in which the probability state continues are different for each internal winning combination. The lottery values are associated with each other, and when an internal winning combination is won for “common bell”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “chance replay”, and “chance eye”, the probability state is low to high. Surely, it is a lottery value that is easy to shift from high accuracy to super high accuracy and that ultra high accuracy is easily maintained.

<Pseudo bonus reference table>
The pseudo bonus reference table shown in FIG. 45 is a table in which each effect content of each pseudo bonus to be executed is set in the pseudo bonus transfer process shown in FIG. 140 and the pseudo bonus mid-process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142.

  In the pseudo bonus reference table shown in FIG. 45, pseudo bonus types, pseudo bonus color types, pseudo bonus promotion game state flags, and pseudo bonus information of a pseudo bonus navigation counter correspond to the first to sixth pseudo bonus states, respectively. It is attached.

  The pseudo bonus type is a value used by the sub control circuit 101 to identify a winning pseudo bonus state in each control process by the sub control circuit 101 described later, and the pseudo bonus type 1 is the first pseudo bonus state. , The pseudo bonus type 2 corresponds to the second pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus type 3 corresponds to the third pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus type 4 corresponds to the fourth pseudo bonus state. The pseudo bonus type 7 is associated with the fifth pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus type 8 is associated with the sixth pseudo bonus state.

  In addition, the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 are respectively associated with the first and second pseudo bonus states, and when the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 are selected, the pseudo bonus promotion game state is executed. It is configured as follows.

  Since the first and second pseudo bonus states are associated with the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6, the sub-control circuit 101 executes the pseudo bonus promotion random determination in the third specific effect state (see step S757 in FIG. 155). ), The sub game state is shifted to the first and second pseudo bonus states when an end condition (described later) for ending the third specific effect state without winning the pseudo bonus type 7 at all is established. It is configured to be.

  With this configuration, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the sub game state to be changed to the first and second pseudo game states even when the transition to the pseudo bonus addition state (described later) is not determined in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. Since the state is shifted to the bonus state, many benefits can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  The pseudo bonus color type is a value used by the sub control circuit 101 to identify a symbol combination that can be displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 when shifting the gaming state to each pseudo bonus state. The bonus color type 1 is associated with the display of "red BAR-red BAR-red BAR", the pseudo bonus color type 2 is associated with the display of "blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR", and the pseudo bonus color type 3 Is associated with the display of "red BAR-red BAR-blue BAR", the pseudo bonus color type 4 is associated with the display of "blue BAR-blue BAR-red BAR", and the pseudo bonus color type 5 is "white BAR". −white BAR−white BAR ”.

  The pseudo bonus promotion game state flag is a value used for the sub-control circuit 101 to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo bonus promotion game state described later. When the pseudo bonus promotion game state flag is 1, , A pseudo bonus promotion game state is executed.

  The pseudo bonus navigation counter is associated with the number of times the push order navigation of the eight-bell role is executed in each pseudo bonus gaming state.

  Here, in the following description, the first to fourth pseudo bonus states are defined as follows: the first pseudo bonus state is a red same color pseudo bonus state, and the second pseudo bonus state is blue, based on the associated pseudo bonus color type. The same color pseudo bonus state, the third pseudo bonus state, and the fourth pseudo bonus state are also referred to as red different color pseudo bonus state and blue different color pseudo bonus state, respectively. In the fifth pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus color type is 1, but during the pseudo bonus during the pseudo bonus process (see FIGS. 141 and 142), the ART random lottery (see (a) in FIGS. 56 to 58). ), (B)), when a pseudo bonus transition symbol (described later) is displayed, the pseudo lottery ART lottery table (with a high probability of winning the AT winning number having the content that adds the number of sets in the AT state) (see FIG. 58 (a) and (b)), the pseudo special game addition state in the present embodiment is configured, and in the following description, the fifth pseudo bonus state is referred to as the pseudo bonus addition state. Describe. In addition, the sixth pseudo bonus state is also referred to as a special pseudo bonus state in the following description from the associated pseudo bonus navigation counter.

<Normal time pseudo bonus lottery table>
The normal-time pseudo bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D are tables that are referred to when performing the pseudo bonus type lottery in the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136.

  As shown in FIGS. 46A to 46C, the normal pseudo bonus lottery table is configured such that different normal pseudo bonus lottery tables are selected depending on the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. I have. For example, when the probability state is low, the normal pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 46A is selected.

  The normal-time pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 46D is a table selected when a pseudo bonus ceiling counter (described later) reaches a predetermined value, and includes “BAR loss”, “BAR alignment”, The winning probabilities of the respective pseudo bonus types are set so that, when an internal winning combination other than “additional BAR” is won, the first to fourth or sixth pseudo bonus state is always won.

  In each normal-time pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 46 (c), the normal pseudo-bonus lottery table selected when the probability state is super-highly probable is selected when the probability state is low-probability or high-probability. The winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set higher than the normal pseudo bonus lottery table shown in b).

<Pseudo bonus promotion lottery table>
The pseudo bonus promotion lottery tables shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIGS. 47 and 48 include the precursor processing shown in FIG. 138, the pseudo bonus shift processing shown in FIG. 140, and the first bonus shown in FIGS. 147 and 148. It is a table referred to when executing the pseudo bonus promotion random determination in the processing during the AT state, the second processing during the AT state shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, and the processing during the pseudo bonus promotion game state shown in FIG. 155. Here, the promotion random determination is a process of randomly determining whether or not to promote the currently won pseudo bonus state to a more advantageous pseudo bonus state for the player.

  As shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIGS. 47 and 48, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table includes each control process executed by the sub control circuit 101 and the pseudo bonus color type of the currently won pseudo bonus state. , Different pseudo bonus promotion lottery tables are selected. For example, the sub-control circuit 101 executes a forehead payout lottery process, and the pseudo bonus color type of the pseudo bonus state currently being won is a pseudo bonus color in which a symbol combination of the same color can be displayed in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect. In the case of types 1 and 2, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 47A is selected.

  In each pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, a different lottery value for each internal winning combination is associated with each pseudo bonus state that can be promoted. As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (e), the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus color types are the pseudo bonus color types 1 and 2 includes pseudo pseudo bonus type 5 to 7 pseudo lottery values. It is associated with the bonus state. Also, as shown in FIGS. 48A to 48E, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus color types are the pseudo bonus color types 3 and 4 has the lottery values of the pseudo bonus types 1 and 2. Is associated with the pseudo bonus state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state moves to the pseudo bonus state, the pachislot machine 1 has the same symbol combination as the symbol combination compared to the pseudo bonus state in which different symbol combinations can be displayed. The pseudo bonus state that can be displayed is configured to be more advantageous for the player.

<Pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table>
The pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIGS. 49 and 50 is executed in order to shift the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state in the pseudo bonus shift processing shown in FIG. This is a table that is referred to when determining the push order navigation.

  As shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIGS. 49 and 50, the pseudo bonus determination screen effect navigation lottery table is managed by the pseudo bonus type and the main control circuit 91 in the pseudo bonus state that has been won. It is configured such that a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table different depending on the effect game state is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 (a), (c), (e), and FIG. 50 (b), a pseudo bonus determination screen effect navigating lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 0 is each normal If the internal winning combination is normal replay when the replay and each pressing order bell are won, a pseudo special gaming state transition symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the pseudo bonus color type of the pseudo bonus state being won is displayed on the reel display window 4. (For example, when the pseudo bonus color type is the pseudo bonus color type 1, “red BAR-red BAR-red BAR” can be displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 “middle-right” -Left "), and if the internal winning combination is a pressing order bell, a pressing order navigation for winning the eight-page bell combination is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b), (d), and FIGS. 50 (a), (c), a pseudo bonus determination screen effect navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 1 is: When each of the normal replays is won, a push order navigator that can display a symbol corresponding to the pseudo bonus color type of the pseudo bonus state that has been won in each normal replay in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is executed. Is configured not to execute the push order navigation when winning.

  Thereby, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the pseudo bonus state, and when the sub-control circuit 101 executes the pseudo bonus transition process, if the effect gaming state is the effect gaming state 0, the pressing order is changed. By executing the pushing order navigation at the time of winning the bell and winning the eight-bell role, the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect game state from the effect game state 0 to the effect game state 1. Further, if the effect game state is the effect game state 1, the pachislot machine 1 does not execute the pushing order navigation of the pushing order bell, and the main control circuit 91 changes the effect game state from the effect game state 1 to the effect game state 2. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (d), the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect selection lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 2 to 4 is normal replay irrespective of the winning pseudo bonus color type. In addition, in the case where the player has won the push order bell, the push order navigation is not executed.

  As a result, the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not execute the pushing order navigation when the sub-control circuit 101 executes the pseudo bonus shift process and the effect game state is the effect game state 2 to 4. In this way, by giving a one-page-bell combination at the time of winning in the pushing order bell, the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect game state from the effect game states 2 to 4 to the effect game state 0.

  FIG. 50 (e) shows a state in which the push order navigation is not executed and the penalty state set when the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 19L at the time of the push order bell winning is performed. This is a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table that is selected regardless of the pseudo bonus color type and the effect game state of the pseudo bonus state in which the push order navigation is not executed when the normal replay and the push order bell are won. Have been.

<ART reference table>
The ART reference table shown in FIG. 51 is a table in which each effect content of the AT state to be set is set in the common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the ART reference table, for each AT winning number, “ART success / fail” relating to the success / failure of the AT state, and the gaming state is shifted to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state. The “loop reference” related to the loop rate as the continuation probability as a probability, the “ART set number” related to the number of sets as the continuation number of times that one set of AT states are continuously executed, and a special Information relating to the “number of special mode 6 sets” related to the number of times the special mode 6 is set as the special mode among the modes is associated with each other. The ART content shown in FIG. 51 indicates the content of information associated with each AT winning number.

  Here, when the sub-control circuit 101 wins each AT winning number by the ART lottery, information on the ART success / failure, the loop reference, the number of ART sets, and the number of 6 special mode sets associated with the selected AT winning number. Are respectively stored in predetermined areas. For example, ART pass / fail is stored in an ART pass / fail storage area, and the special mode 6 set number is stored in a special mode 6 stock counter.

  As shown in FIG. 51, since the AT winning number 1 is associated with “0”, which is a loss for each of the ART winning / losing, the loop reference, the number of ART sets, and the number of 6 special mode sets, the ART content is “ Lost ".

  The AT winning numbers 2 to 6 are associated with “1”, which is an AT winning, as ART winning or non-winning, and are associated with “1” to “5” having different loop rates as loop references, respectively. , ART contents are “Loop A” to “Loop E”.

  Here, the loop references 1 to 5 are set to loop rates of 25%, 33%, 50%, 66%, and 80%, respectively, and based on the selected loop rate after the end of the second AT state. By shifting the gaming state to the first AT state, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to continue the AT state.

  The loop reference is stored in a loop reference stock table. Here, the loop reference stock table is such that when an AT winning number associated with the loop references 1 to 5 is won by the ART lottery, the loop reference associated with the selected AT winning number is stored in the loop reference stock table. A loop reference stored at the end and stored at the head of the loop reference stock table is a table set as a loop rate to be referred in each control process.

  The AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are respectively associated with “1” to “3” and “5” as the number of ART sets, so that the ART contents are “1set” to “3set” and “5set”. ing.

  Here, the number of ART sets “1” to “3” and “5” are associated with the number of sets in the AT state of 1 to 3 sets and 5 sets, respectively. Further, the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are associated with “0” which does not win the AT state as ART winning / non-winning.

  For this reason, the sub control circuit 101 determines the number of sets determined when the AT winning number corresponding to “1” is won and the AT state is executed, and when the AT winning number 7 to 10 is won. When the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are won in order to execute the AT state for minutes, the set number of AT states corresponding to the ART set number is provided in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 of the sub control circuit 101. The number of sets is added to the set loop stock table, and the number of sets is stocked.

Since the AT winning numbers 11 and 12 are respectively associated with “1” and “2” as the special mode 6 set number, the ART contents are “special mode 6 1set” and “special mode 6”.
2set ".

  Here, the special mode 6 set numbers “1” and “2” are associated with the special mode 6 set numbers of one and two sets, respectively.

Since the AT winning numbers 13 to 21 have a plurality of contents of the above-described AT winning numbers 2 to 12, respectively, the ART content is set to “1set + special mode” in accordance with the content of each of the AT winning numbers 13 to 21. 6 1set ”,“ Loop D + 1set ”,“ Loop E + 1set ”,“ Loop D + 3set ”,“ Loop E + 3set ”,“ Loop D + Special mode 6 ”
1 loop "," loop E + special mode 62 set "," loop D + special mode 62 set ", and" loop E + special mode 62 set ".

  Here, the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 are associated with the loop rate and the number of sets in the AT state, but are associated with “0” which does not win the AT state as ART success or failure. For this reason, the sub control circuit 101 determines the number of sets determined when the AT winning number 14 to 17 is won when the AT state is executed by winning the AT winning number associated with “1” as the ART winning or failing. After executing the AT state for the determined number of sets, the lottery for determining whether to continue the AT state based on the loop rate determined when the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 are won after the execution of the determined number of AT states. Execute

  The sub RAM 103, which stores the loop rate in the loop reference stock table and stores the number of sets in the loop stock table, forms a continuation information storage unit.

  In the following description, “winning ART content” means that an AT winning number having the corresponding ART content has been won.

<RT lottery table during normal pseudo-bonus win>
The normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table as the specific effect state lottery table shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 52 to 54 is a pseudo bonus type lottery in the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136. It is a table referred to when executing the ART lottery at the time of winning.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIGS. 52 to 54, the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table differs depending on the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. At the time of bonus winning, the ART lottery table is selected. For example, when the normal mode is the normal mode 1 and the probability state is inaccurate, the normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table shown in FIG. 52A is selected.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIGS. 52 to 54, in the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table, each ART content is associated with a lottery value for each pseudo pseudo bonus state that has been won. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (c), the normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table which is selected when the probability state is extremely high is selected when the probability state is low or high. The winning probability of the ART contents “Loop B” to “Loop E” is set higher than the ART lottery table at the time of normal pseudo bonus state winning shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. ing.

  Here, when each ART content is won, the sub-control circuit 101 refers to the ART reference table shown in FIG. 51 and associates the ART success or failure of the won ART content with “1”, which is the AT state winning. It is determined whether or not the player has won the AT state. In the following description, when performing the ART lottery, the sub control circuit 101 determines the ART content based on the lottery value specified in each table, and refers to the ART reference table to determine the ART content. The presence / absence of winning in the AT state is determined with reference to the associated information on the ART winning / losing.

<A pseudo lottery winning ART lottery table during pseudo bonus winning>
The ART lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus winning during the pseudo bonus winning shown in FIG. 55 is a table referred to when executing the ART lottery at the time of the pseudo bonus lottery during the pseudo bonus winning in the pseudo bonus transition processing shown in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 55, in the pseudo-bonus-winning ART lottery table during pseudo-bonus winning, each ART content is associated with a lottery value for each pseudo-bonus state that has been won.

<ART lottery table during pseudo bonus>
The pseudo lottery ART random determination table shown in each of (a) and (b) of FIGS. 56 to 58 is a table which is referred to when executing the ART lottery in the pseudo bonus bonus processing shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. .

  As shown in each of (a) and (b) of FIGS. 56 to 58, in the pseudo bonus ART lottery table, different ART random lottery tables are selected depending on whether the ART is valid and the pseudo bonus state being executed. It is configured as follows. For example, ART is “0”, that is, the AT state is not won, and the pseudo bonus state is the first and second pseudo bonus states, that is, “red BAR−red BAR−red BAR” in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect. "Or" blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR "is executed, the ART random determination table during the pseudo bonus shown in FIG. 56 (a) is selected.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 56 to 58, in the ART random lottery table during each pseudo bonus, a lottery value is associated with each ART content for each internal winning combination. As shown in (a) of FIGS. 56 to 58, the ART random lottery table during the pseudo bonus selected when the ART win / fail is “0” includes “common bell”, “weak cherry”, When winning the “strong cherry”, the “chance replay”, and the “chance eye”, the lottery values of the ART contents “Loop B” to “Loop E” in which the ART success / failure is “1” are high. Further, as shown in (b) of FIGS. 56 to 58, the ART random lottery table during the pseudo bonus selected when the ART win / fail is “1” includes “common bell” and “weak cherry” as internal wins. , "Cherry Cherry", "Chance Replay", and "Chance Eye", the ART success / failure is "0", and one lot of AT state is stocked. ing.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 56 to 58, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 that executes various control processes has the same color transition symbol as the pseudo bonus type. When the pseudo bonus types 1 and 2 that can be won are won, the ART status is associated with the AT state winning more than when the pseudo bonus types 3 and 4 where different color transition symbols can be won as the pseudo bonus type. The AT winning number is easily won.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide a difference in the winning probability in the AT state between the same color transition symbol and the different color transition symbol, so that the game state has a change. Can be.

<ART Navigation Lottery Table>
The ART navigation lottery tables shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and (b) correspond to the processing in the first AT state shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the processing in the second AT state shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, and FIGS. In the pseudo bonus promotion game state shown, it is a table that is referred to when determining the pressing order navigation at the time of winning the pressing order bell.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the ART navigation lottery tables are configured such that different ART navigation lottery tables are selected depending on the effect game state managed by the main control circuit 91.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the ART navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 2 to 4 indicates that, when each of the pressing order bells is won, a press for winning the eight-page bell role is performed. It is configured to execute forward navigation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the ART navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 0, 1 is such that when each pressing order bell is won, an eight-bell role is won. It is configured to execute a push order navigation.

  Thereby, the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sub-control circuit 101 executes the AT state or the pseudo bonus promotion game state, if the effect game state is the effect game state 0, 1, the push order bell. By executing the push order navigation at the time of winning of, and winning the eight-bell role, the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect game state from the effect game state 0, 1 to the effect game state 2 to 4.

<Special table lottery table>
The special table lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is a table referred to when the special table is determined in the first AT state pre-start processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the setting change normal mode reference table lottery table, the lottery probabilities of the respective tables are associated with different lottery values with the set values “1” to “6”.

  Here, the special table includes special tables 1 to 50. Further, each special table is a table composed of special table information 0 to 24. When determining a special mode table used when determining a special mode, the special table and the special table information are included. Used. Each special table information is initialized in the first AT state pre-processing when the special mode is not set, and the number of the currently selected special table information selected when the AT state is continued. Is used in the next first AT state pre-start processing.

<Special mode table reference table>
The special mode table reference table illustrated in FIG. 61 is a table that is referred to when the special mode table is determined in the first AT state pre-start processing illustrated in FIGS. 145 and 146.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the special mode table is determined from the special table selected by the sub-control circuit 101 and the special table information. For example, when the special table 1 is selected as the special table and the special table information 0 is selected as the special table information, the special mode table is determined as the special mode table 11.

  Here, the special mode table is a table composed of special mode tables 1 to 17, and is used when the special mode is determined in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.

<First AT state start special mode table ART lottery table>
The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b) is used when executing the ART lottery in the first AT state start pre-process shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. Table to be referenced.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table is the first AT state game number lottery stored in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table which is different depending on the flag selected in the state is configured to be selected.

  The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (a) is referred to when the normal state flag or the second AT state pseudo bonus state continuation flag is selected as the AT state flag. Is done. In addition, the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIG. 62B is referred to when the pseudo AT continuation flag during the first AT state is selected as the AT state flag.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), in the first AT mode start special mode table ART lottery table, the ART contents “losing”, “special mode 63set” and “special mode 65set” are won. The probability is associated with a lottery value for each of the special mode tables 1 to 17.

<Special mode shift lottery table at start of first AT state>
The first AT state start special mode transition lottery table shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 63 to 71 shows the special mode in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. This is a table that is referred to when a decision is made.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 63 to 71, the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table includes the special mode selected by the sub control circuit 101 and the sub mode of the sub control circuit 101. The first AT state start special mode transition lottery table which is different depending on the flag selected in the special mode lottery state stored in the predetermined area is configured to be selected. For example, when the special mode 1 is selected as the special mode and the normal time flag is selected as the AT state flag, the first AT mode start special mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 63A is selected. You.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIGS. 63 to 71, in the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of each special mode differs in the special mode tables 1 to 17. A lottery value is associated.

<Pseudo bonus lottery table during first AT state>
The pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B is referred to when the pseudo bonus type lottery is executed in the processing during the first AT state shown in FIGS. 147 and 148. Table.

  As shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the pseudo bonus lottery table in the first AT state is different from the pseudo bonus in the first AT state depending on the probability state during the AT selected by the sub-control circuit 101. The lottery table is configured to be selected. For example, when the probability state during AT is the same color normal, the pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state shown in FIG. 72A is selected.

  In each first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the first pseudo bonus lottery table during the AT state selected when the probability state during AT is the same color high accuracy is selected when the probability state during AT is the same color normal. Compared with the pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state shown in (a), the probability of winning the pseudo bonus color types 1 and 2 that can display the same color symbol combination in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is higher, In addition, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus types of the pseudo bonus color types 3 and 4 where different symbol combinations can be displayed in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is set low.

<Pseudo bonus lottery table during second AT state>
The pseudo bonus lottery table in the second AT state shown in each of (a) and (b) of FIGS. 73 to 82 executes the pseudo bonus type lottery in the processing in the second AT state shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. This is a table that is referred to when performing the operation.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 73 to 82, the pseudo bonus lottery table in the second AT state differs depending on the special mode and the AT probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. The pseudo bonus lottery table is selected during the second AT state. For example, when the special mode is the special mode 1 and the probability state during the AT is the same color normal, the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIG. 73A is selected.

  In each second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIGS. 73 to 82B, the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when each AT probability state is the same color high-precision is selected when the AT probability state is the same color normal. Compared with the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 73 to 82A, pseudo bonuses of the pseudo bonus color types 1 and 2 in which symbol combinations of the same color can be displayed in the pseudo bonus determination screen effect The winning probabilities of the pseudo bonus types of the pseudo bonus colors 3 and 4 in which different types of symbol combinations can be displayed in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect are set low.

  As shown in FIG. 73 to FIG. 82 (b), the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when each AT probability state is the same color high-accuracy is the same. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 is set higher than that of the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can easily transition to the pseudo bonus promotion game state by the symbol combination of the replay symbols displayed in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state. Since it is suggested, the player can be interested in the winning combination in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a), (b), 77 (a), (b), 78 (a), (b), 80 (a), (b), a special mode The pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state, which is selected when mode 2 is selected, wins “Chance Replay” as an internal winning combination compared to the other pseudo bonus lottery tables during the second AT state. In this case, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a), (b), 77 (a), (b), 79 (a), (b), 80 (a), and (b), a special mode The pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state, which is selected when mode 3 is selected, wins “common bell” as an internal winning combination compared to the other pseudo bonus lottery tables during the second AT state. In this case, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (a), (b), 78 (a), (b), 79 (a), (b), 80 (a), and (b), a special mode The pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state, which is selected when the mode 4 is selected, is compared with the other pseudo bonus lottery tables during the second AT state. The winning probability of each pseudo bonus type when the “strong cherry” is won is set high.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 81 (a), (b), and FIGS. 82 (a), (b), during the second AT state selected when special modes 5 and 6 are selected as special modes. The pseudo bonus lottery table is different from the pseudo bonus lottery table in the other second AT state in that the “chance replay”, “common bell”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry” are won as internal winning combinations. The winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

<ART lottery table during pseudo bonus win during AT state>
The pseudo lottery winning ART lottery table during the AT state shown in each of (a) and (b) of FIGS. 83 and 84 is the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 and shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. It is a table referred to at the time of the ART lottery executed when the pseudo bonus type lottery is won in the second processing during the AT state.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 83 and 84, the ART lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus win in the AT state depends on the AT state being executed and the special mode selected by the sub game circuit 101. The configuration is such that the ART lottery table is selected at the time of the pseudo bonus winning in different AT states.

  The ART lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus in the AT state shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and 84 (a) is referred to when the first AT state is executed, and when the special mode 6 is selected. 84 (a). Also, the ART lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus in the AT state shown in FIG. 83 (b) and FIG. 84 (b) is referred to when the second AT state is executed, and the special mode 6 is selected. In this case, FIG. 84B is referred to.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 83 and 84, in the ART lottery table at the time of the pseudo-bonus winning in the AT state, the ART contents “losing”, “1set”, “special mode 6 1set”, and “loop” The winning probability of “D + special mode 6 3set”, “loop E + special mode 6 3set”, “loop D + special mode 6 5set” and “loop E + special mode 6 5set” corresponds to the lottery value for each pseudo-bonus state won. It is attached.

<ART loop lottery table>
The ART loop lottery tables shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (g) show that in the first AT state pre-start processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the game state is changed to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state. This is a table that is referred to when executing an ART loop lottery for determining whether or not to continue the AT state by shifting the state.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (g), the ART loop lottery table is configured such that different ART loop lottery tables are selected in accordance with each control information controlled by the sub-control circuit 101.

  The ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. 85A is an ART loop lottery table selected when the conditions for selecting the ART lottery tables shown in FIGS. 85B to 85G are not satisfied. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value for each loop rate determined by the ART lottery. For example, if the ART content won in the ART lottery is a loop A in which the AT state continues with a probability of 25%, a continuation or special continuation is won with a probability of 25%.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85B is an ART loop lottery table selected when the AT state is stocked in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so that a continuation or special continuation is always won regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART random determination table shown in FIG. 85C is an ART loop random determination table selected when the special mode 6 is selected as the special mode. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so that a continuation or special continuation is always won regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (d) is an ART loop lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag is selected during the first AT state as the loop lottery state. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so that a continuation or special continuation is always won regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85E is an ART loop selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is selected as the loop lottery state and the special continuation is won in the previous ART loop lottery. It is a lottery table. The lottery value of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win the special continuation regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (f) is an ART loop lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the third AT state is selected as the loop lottery state. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so that a continuation or special continuation is always won regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (g) shows an ART loop selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag is selected in the second AT state as the loop lottery state and the special continuation is won in the previous ART loop lottery. It is a lottery table. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so that a continuation or special continuation is always won regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

<Special mode transition lottery table for special continuation>
The special continuation special mode shift lottery table shown in FIG. 86 is a table referred to when the special mode is determined in the second AT state initial process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the special mode transition special lottery table at the time of special continuation, a different lottery value is associated with the special mode for each currently selected special mode. The lottery value is set such that the mode is changed to the special mode which is the same as the currently selected special mode or the special mode which is more advantageous to the player than the currently selected special mode.

<ART lottery table when special conditions are satisfied>
The ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied shown in FIG. 87 is a table which is referred to when executing the ART lottery in the second AT state end processing shown in FIG. 153.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied, a lottery value is associated with each ART content.

<ART lottery table for execution of pseudo bonus addition state>
The ART lottery table at the time of execution of the pseudo bonus added state shown in FIG. 88 is a table referred to when executing the ART lottery in the pseudo bonus state end processing shown in FIGS. 143 and 144.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the ART lottery table during execution of the pseudo bonus added state, each ART content is represented by a value of a pseudo bonus added counter (described later) stored in a predetermined area of the sub control circuit 101, respectively. Different lottery values are associated.

<Normal predictor game number lottery table>
The normal sign game number lottery tables shown in FIGS. 89 to 94 are tables referred to when determining the number of games in which the sign state is executed in the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136.

  As shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 94, the normal game precursor lottery table shows whether or not the pseudo bonus state, whether or not the AT state when the pseudo bonus state has been won, the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub control circuit 101. Thus, different normal game sign lottery tables are selected. For example, when the pseudo bonus state has not been won, when the normal mode is the normal mode 1 and the probability state is low, the normal time precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 89A is selected. .

  In each of the normal-time precursor game number lottery tables, a different lottery value for each internal winning combination is associated with each precursor game number, which is the number of times the precursor state is executed. As shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, the normal time precursor game number lottery table selected when the probability state is extremely high is shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 92 which are selected when the probability state is low or high probability. The winning probability of each of the precursor game numbers having a large number of games is set higher than the normal precursor game number lottery table shown.

<First AT state game number lottery table>
The first AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 95 is the first AT state game number as the number of games in the first AT state in the first AT state pre-start processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. Is a table that is referred to when deciding.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the first AT state game number lottery table, each first AT state game number, which is the number of times the first AT state is executed, is selected by the sub control circuit 101. A lottery value is associated with each AT state flag.

<First AT state game number lottery table>
The first lot-of-AT-games lottery table shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and (b) executes the extra lottery for adding the first number of AT-state games in the pseudo bonus middle processing shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. This is a table that is referred to when performing the operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), the first AT state game number addition lottery table is different depending on whether or not an AT winning number for stocking the number of sets in the ART lottery during the pseudo bonus is won. It is configured such that a state game number added lottery table is selected.

  The ART lottery table during pseudo bonus win in the AT state shown in FIG. 96 (a) is referred to when the number of sets in the ART random lottery during the similar bonus has not been won to the AT win number for stocking. In addition, the first AT state game number addition lottery table shown in FIG. 96B is referred to when the number of sets in the ART lottery during the similar bonus is won to the AT winning number to stock.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), in the first AT state game number addition lottery table, each additional first AT state game number is associated with a lottery value for each internal winning combination. If the internal winning combination is won as “common bell”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “chance replay”, and “chance eye”, the first AT state game number is added. It is a random lottery value.

<Second AT state game number lottery table>
The second AT state game number lottery table shown in FIGS. 97 to 102 shows the second AT state game number as the number of games in the second AT state in the second AT state initial process shown in FIG. This is a table that is referred to when a decision is made.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 102, the second AT state game number random determination table is different from the second AT state game number random determination table depending on the AT continuation type and the special mode selected by the sub control circuit 101. It is configured to be. For example, when the AT continuation type is “No continuation” and the special mode is one of the special modes 1 to 5, the second AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 97 is selected. .

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 102, in the second AT state game number lottery table, each second AT state game number, which is the number of times the second AT state is executed, is determined by ART lottery. Different lottery values are associated with each loop rate. As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the second AT state game number lottery table selected when a plurality of special modes are selected is a table selected when one special mode is selected. As compared with the second AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 99, the winning probability of each second AT state game number having a large number of games is set higher.

<First pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table>
The notification timing lottery table at the time of the first pseudo bonus selection effect shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 103 and 104 is shown in FIG. 156 when the player selects the first pseudo bonus selection effect. It is a table that is referred to when determining at which notification timing the ART winning or non-winning is determined in the winning operation command receiving process.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 103 and 104, the first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table has different first pseudo bonuses depending on the winning AT state loop rate. The configuration is such that a selection effect notification timing lottery table is selected. For example, when the winning AT state loop rate is Loop A, the first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table shown in FIG. 103B is selected.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 103 and 104, in the first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table, each notification timing has a set value selected by the main control circuit 91. Different lottery values are associated with each other.

  Here, each of the first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery tables selected when the ART winning or non-winning is a win, the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91 depends on the notification timing of the win as a result of the lottery. It is configured to indicate which one it is. For example, the notification timing 3 is configured such that the probability of winning is high when the setting value “1”, the setting “3”, and the setting “5” having odd numbers are selected.

<Second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table>
The notification timing lottery table at the time of the second pseudo bonus selection effect shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 105 and 106 is shown in FIG. 156 when the player selects the second pseudo bonus selection effect. It is a table that is referred to when determining at which notification timing the ART winning or non-winning is determined in the winning operation command receiving process.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIGS. 105 and 106, the second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table differs depending on the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91. The configuration is such that the notification timing lottery table at the time of the pseudo bonus selection effect is selected. For example, when the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91 is “1”, the second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table shown in FIG. 105A is selected.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 105 and 106, in the second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table, each notification timing is selected based on the loop rate of the winning AT state. A different lottery value is associated with each set value.

  Here, each of the second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery tables is configured to indicate which of the winning AT state loop rates is based on the notification timing at which the lottery has been won. For example, the notification timing 4 is configured to be won when loops C to E are selected as the loop rate.

<End effect lottery table at the time of executing the third pseudo bonus selection effect>
When the player selects the third pseudo bonus selection effect at the time of execution of the pseudo pseudo bonus selection effect shown in FIG. 107, the pseudo effect in the pseudo bonus end process shown in FIG. It is a table referred to when determining an effect for notifying that the bonus state has ended.

  As shown in FIG. 107, end effects Nos. 1 to 37 are associated with each end effect notifying that the pseudo bonus state has ended. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, in the end effect lottery table at the time of executing the third pseudo bonus selection effect, the normal mode selected in the next game and the third pseudo bonus selection effect are selected for each end effect. In the ART lottery executed when the pseudo bonus state is won, when the AT state is won, a different lottery value is associated with the loop rate of the AT state that has been won.

  Here, the end effect lottery table at the time of execution of the third pseudo bonus selection effect is either the normal mode selected in the next game or the loop rate of the won AT state depending on the end effect won as a result of the lottery. It is configured to suggest.

  The end effect is composed of a normal end effect and first to third special end effects, and the contents of the effects are different from each other. In addition, each end effect includes nine types of end effects indicating four types of end effects indicating the normal mode selected in the next game and five types of end effects indicating the loop rate of the winning AT state. Each is configured.

  For example, the normal end effects include normal end effects 1 to 4 indicating a normal mode to be selected in the next game, normal end effects AT 1 to 5 indicating a winning AT state loop rate, And 9 end effects.

  Here, the normal end effects 1 and 2 can be won when any of the normal modes 1 to 5 is selected in the next game. The normal end effect 3 can be won when the normal modes 3 to 5 are selected in the next game. The normal end effect 4 can be won when the normal modes 4 and 5 are selected in the next game.

  In other words, when the normal end effect 4 is executed as the end effect, the player is suggested to win in the AT state when the pseudo bonus state is won in the next and subsequent games. .

[Main game state change]
<Transition of RT game state>
As shown in FIG. 108, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main game state on the main control side controlled by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) as a general game state (RT0 game state), an RT1 game state, and an MB. There is a game state.

  The RT0 gaming state is an initial state at the time of shipment of the pachislot machine 1. The main gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state when the MB gaming state ends. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which a winning number is randomly determined based on an internal lottery table for a general gaming state (see FIG. 22), and is a low replay probability state in which the winning probability of a normal replay as a replaying combination is low.

  The main gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state when an internal winning combination “F_MB” (winning number 51) is won during the RT0 gaming state.

  The RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which a winning number is randomly determined based on the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 23), and is a replay high probability state in which the winning probability of the normal replay is higher than the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, the RT1 gaming state is not an RT managed by the number of games, but continues unless an activated symbol in the MB gaming state wins. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state is infinite RT.

  The main gaming state shifts to the MB gaming state when an operating symbol (winning combination “C_MB1, 2”) in the MB gaming state wins during the RT1 gaming state.

  The MB gaming state is a gaming state in which all small wins (see FIGS. 14 to 17) are internally won, and the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number of payouts (30 in the present embodiment). To end.

  Although details will be described later, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the internal winning combination “F_MB” with a high probability in the RT0 gaming state and wins the operation symbol in the MB gaming state in the RT1 gaming state. Since it has become difficult, the main game state is set to a substantially RT1 game state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, on condition that “F_MB” as the predetermined bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main gaming state is shifted to the bonus flag carryover state, and the operation symbol related to the MB is changed. The main game state is shifted from the carry-over state of the bonus flag to the MB game state as the bonus game state, on condition that the combination (also referred to as an actuation combination) is displayed on a winning line described later.

  The transition from the main gaming state to the bonus flag carryover state or the MB gaming state is performed by the main CPU 93 (see FIG. 8).

  In the MB gaming state of the present embodiment, the number of medals to be inserted (BET number) and the number of payouts for performing the unit game are defined so that the number of medals given to the player does not increase. . For example, when two coins are inserted (two bets), two coins are paid out, so that the number of medals given to the player can be prevented from increasing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, while the main gaming state is the above-described bonus flag carryover state, the RT1 gaming state is set. In this way, by setting the bonus flag carryover state to the RT1 gaming state, the number of RT gaming states managed by the main control circuit 91 can be reduced to substantially one. The amount of data to be handled can be reduced, and the load on the main control circuit 91 can be significantly reduced by the pseudo bonus game.

[Main control processing]
The main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 simulates the effect game state on the main control side in accordance with the transition diagram shown in FIG. 109, and executes various processes in accordance with the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Transition of production game state>
As shown in FIG. 109, in the pachislot machine 1, as the effect game states that are pseudo-changed in the main CPU 93, a normal state (effect game state 0), a preparation state (effect game state 1), and a specific effect state ( There are an ART state (effect state 2) which is an AT state), a pseudo bonus state (effect state 3) which is a pseudo special game state, and a special (premium) pseudo bonus state (effect state 4).

  The transition between the effect game states 0 to 4 on the main control side is performed to execute a game lock effect that temporarily locks the progress of the game between the start and end of the pseudo bonus.

  In the effect game state 0, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 1 on condition that the combination of the operating symbols relating to the eight-bell function is displayed on the winning line. In the effect game state 0, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 3 on condition that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed in a specific pressing order at the time of winning the above-described normal replay.

  In the rendering game state 1, when the above-described push order bell is won, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in the push order in which the eight-bell role cannot be won, and when the eight-bell role is not displayed, the so-called In the case of "spill" (when one medal is obtained), the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 0. In the effect gaming state 1, the effect gaming state shifts to the effect gaming state 2 on condition that the combination of the operating symbols related to the eight-bell function is displayed on the winning line. In the effect game state 1, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 3 on condition that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in a specific pressing order at the time of winning the above-described normal replay. In the effect gaming state 1, the effect gaming state shifts to the effect gaming state 4 on condition that the combination of the operating symbols related to the above-described premium flag (F_Premieralp) is displayed on the winning line.

  In the effect game state 2, at the time of winning the pressing order bell, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in the pressing order in which the eight-bell role cannot be won, and the eight-bell role is not displayed. (When one medal is acquired), the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 0.

  In the effect gaming state 3, the effect gaming state shifts to the effect gaming state 4 on condition that the combination of the operating symbols related to the above-mentioned premium flag (F_Premieralp) is displayed on the winning line.

  In the rendering game states 3 and 4, when the pressing order bell is won, the stop buttons 19L, 19C and 19R are pressed in the pressing order in which the eight-bell role cannot be won, and the eight-bell role is not displayed. In the case of "spill" (when one medal is obtained), the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 0. In addition, in the production gaming states 3 and 4, the number (count value) of the pseudo bonus counter (not shown) becomes "8", that is, the prize is won eight times in the role of eight bells, so that the production gaming state becomes the production gaming state. Move to state 2.

  Here, the main control circuit 91 executes the game lock effect at the start of the pseudo bonus by changing the effect game state 0 to 4 on condition that the winning of the specific winning combination and the specific pressing order are executed. In addition, it is possible to estimate a change in the sub game state on the sub control side.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below starts when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 93 executes a power-on process shown in FIG. 111 (S10). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal, the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization process according to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an initialization process at the end of one game (one game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display combining storing area of the main RAM 95 is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 112 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process of detecting a start operation are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts three random number values (random number values 1 to 3) and stores them in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S13).

  Here, the random number value 1 is a value used for the internal lottery process, and is extracted from 0 to 65535 in the present embodiment. The random numbers 2 and 3 are values used for other lottery processes, and are extracted from 0 to 65535 and 0 to 255 in the present embodiment.

  The main CPU 93 does not need to extract the random numbers 2 and 3 in step S13, and may extract the random numbers 2 and 3 when using them.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 113 (S14). The main CPU 93 executing the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop initial setting process shown in FIG. 114 (S15). By this reel stop initial setting process, based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination), each information (for example, a stop table number) related to the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95. Is done.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated start command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S16).

  The start command data indicates, for example, the type of a game state flag, the value of a bonus end number counter, the type of an internal winning combination, the type of a flag related to lock and the like, the value of an effect timer, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a wait process (S17). In this wait process, it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the last game start (previous unit game start), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. It is in a waiting state until it does. The predetermined time in the wait process, that is, the wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 115, and rotates all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S18). This reel rotation start processing is executed by interruption processing (reel control processing) shown in FIG. This interrupt process is a process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 ms).

  By this interrupt processing, the drive of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. Thereafter, by the interrupt processing, the drive of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is accelerated until the rotation reaches a constant speed (so-called normal acceleration processing).

  Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, the drive of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled by this interrupt processing, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant speed. To be maintained.

  In the reel rotation start processing, a reel effect (lock effect) such as a reel lock effect described later can also be performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 ( S19).

  By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority order storage process shown in FIG. 116 (S20). In this pull-in priority storage process, a pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 117 is executed, and the pull-in priority of all the symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. That is, in the pull-in priority order storage process, based on the internal winning combination, stop information is stored in the pull-in priority order data storage area for each symbol position of each of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  For example, if the corresponding symbol is the stop permission for each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area based on the pull-in priority table, If the stop is not permitted (for example, if a winning combination is won), data indicating stop prohibition is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119 (S21). With this process, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning search process (S22). In the winning search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped, the combination of the symbols displayed on the winning line and the symbol combination table are collated to determine the combination of the symbols displayed on the winning line. You.

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 31) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 21) are collated, and the collation result is displayed in the display combination storage area (FIG. 30). Reference).

  More specifically, the data in the symbol code storage area is directly copied as the data in the display combination storage area. At this time, the payout number is obtained by referring to the symbol combination table. By the winning search process, the combination of symbols displayed on the reel display window 4 is specified by stopping all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes payout of the number of medals according to the combination of the displayed symbols based on the result of the winning search process (S23). Along with the medal payout processing, control of a hopper drive circuit (not shown) and update of the number of credits are performed based on the payout number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S24). . The winning operation command data represents, for example, the type of display combination, a flag related to lock, the number of paid out medals, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end check process shown in FIG. 121 (S25). By the bonus end check processing, processing for ending the operation of the MB gaming state is executed when the condition for ending the MB gaming state is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 122 (S26). By this bonus operation check process, a process of operating the MB gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S26, the main CPU 93 executes the processing of step S11. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 performs a pseudo bonus executed when the effect game state shifts from the effect game state 1 to the effect game state 3 between the bonus end check processing and the bonus operation check processing. Perform an initial lock. Here, the lock at the start of the pseudo bonus is a game lock effect that is executed when a normal replay is internally won in the effect game state 1 and a first stop operation is performed on a button other than the left stop button 19L.

<Process at power-on>
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG. 110.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S40). In this determination processing, it is determined whether or not the backup is normal by error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores the set value of the pachislot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value and the like in the main RAM 95 as backup data when the power is turned off, and performs the determination process when the power is turned on (S40). , The set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95 are read.

  Then, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read set values and the backed up checksum value, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison results match.

  When determining that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backup set values and the like (S41). As a result, when the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set.

  After executing the processing in step S41, or when it is determined in step S40 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the setting change switch provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachi-slot machine 1 is on. It is determined whether or not it is (S42).

  Here, if it is determined that the setting change switch is ON (YES), the main CPU 93 executes an initialization process at the time of setting change (S43).

  In the initialization process at the time of the setting change, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95 are cleared, and the setting value is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated initialization command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S44). . The initialization command data indicates, for example, whether or not the set value has been changed, the set value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a setting value changing process (S45). In this set value changing process, a set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and when the reset switch is subsequently operated, the selected set value is determined. . As described above, the main CPU 93 that changes the setting value indicating the degree of advantage for the player constitutes an installation changing unit.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is on (S46), and repeatedly executes the process of step S46 until a determination result that the setting change switch is not on is obtained.

  Here, when a determination result that the setting change switch is not in the ON state is obtained (NO), the main CPU 93 generates and generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101. The initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S47), and the power-on processing ends.

  If the main CPU 93 determines in step S42 that the setting change switch is not ON (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S48).

  Here, when the backup is determined to be normal (YES), the main CPU 93 restores the state of the pachislot machine 1 to the state before the power was turned off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95 ( S49), the power-on processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S48 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (S50). In the power-on error processing, the main CPU 93 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

  Note that the main CPU 93 does not release the error state by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch in a state where the backup is not normal (backup error). Only to release the error state.

<Medal acceptance / start check processing>
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG. 110.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether there is an automatic insertion request (S60). In the case of winning the replay combination in the previous unit game, medals are automatically inserted in the current unit game. That is, in the determination process of step S60, it may be determined whether or not a replay combination has been won in the previous unit game.

  In step S60, when determining that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 93 executes an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting medals of the same number as medals inserted in the previous unit game (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of credited medals is the maximum value (S62). Specifically, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the value of the credit counter is “50”.

  In step S60, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), or in step S62, the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credited medals is not the maximum value (NO), Is permitted (S63). For example, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to form a path so that medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 pass through the inside of the selector. By this processing, it is possible to additionally insert medals (credits) at the time of winning the replay.

  After the process of step S63 is performed, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted coins according to the gaming state (S64). In the present embodiment, three cards are set when the main gaming state is other than the MB gaming state, and two cards are set when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the acceptance of medals is permitted (S65).

  Here, if it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the settlement switch 78 is turned on (S66). If it is determined that the payment switch 78 is turned on (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a predetermined payment process such as paying out a credited medal (S67). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path for discharging the credited medals from the medal payout exit 32.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the settlement switch 78 is not turned on (NO), the main CPU 93 executes a medal insertion check process for checking the number of inserted medals (S68). In the medal insertion check processing, the value of the insertion number counter is updated according to the number of checked medals.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes a medal insertion command transmission process (S69), and generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101. Then, the generated medal insertion command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command data indicates, for example, the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the inserted number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number of startable games, and determines whether or not the number of credited medals is the maximum value (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 checks that the number of inserted cards is three in the non-MB gaming state, two in the MB gaming state, and that the credit is 50 in the non-MB gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S70 that the number of inserted medals is the number of games that can be started and the number of credits is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 prohibits the reception of medals (S71). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path for discharging the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 from the medal payout opening 32 without driving the solenoid of the selector.

  After executing the processing in step S71 or in step S70, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is a number that can start a game and the number of credits is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 93 Then, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals is a number at which the game can be started (S72).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the number of inserted medals is set to three when the main gaming state is the non-MB gaming state and to two when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is a number at which a unit game can be started according to the gaming state.

  In step S72, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is a number capable of starting the unit game (YES), or in step S65, it is determined that the reception of medals is not permitted (NO), or in step S62. If it is determined that the number of credits is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the start switch 79 is on (S73).

  Here, if it is determined that the start switch 79 is not turned on (NO), or if it is determined in step S72 that the number of inserted medals is not a number capable of starting a unit game (NO), or the process of step S67 is performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S65.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start switch 79 is on (YES), the main CPU 93 clears the request for automatic insertion (S74).

  After the process of step S74 is performed, the main CPU 93 prohibits the reception of medals (S75), and ends the medal reception / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (S80). This determination process is executed based on whether or not bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area corresponding to the MB gaming state is “1” with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 35).

  That is, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “1”, it is determined that the main game state is the MB game state, and when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “0”, , It is determined that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state.

  Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a process during MB operation (S81). In the MB operating process, the bits corresponding to all the small combinations in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 30) are updated to “1”. When the processing during the MB operation is performed, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery processing.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines in step S80 that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the main gaming state (S82).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIG. 22) when the main game state is the general game state, and sets the main game state to the RT1 game state when the main game state is the general game state. Sets the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 23).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value 1 stored in the random number value storage area (S83).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to a predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S82, and determines the lottery value associated with each winning number (1 to 51 in the present embodiment) of the corresponding setting value. Are obtained one by one, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random number 1 (S84). That is, the main CPU 93 checks the internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the result of the subtraction performed in step S84 is smaller than 0 (S85). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is not smaller than 0 (NO), that is, when determining that so-called borrowing is not performed, the main CPU 93 updates the random number value 1 and the winning number (S86). ).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers in the used internal lottery table have been checked (S87), and when it is determined that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO). , The processing of step S84 is executed.

  On the other hand, when determining that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 93 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S88).

  In the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is set such that the subtraction result does not become 0 or more when the main CPU 93 finishes checking all the winning numbers. It will not be executed.

  In step S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is smaller than 0 (YES), that is, when it determines that so-called borrowing has been performed, the main CPU 93 refers to the set internal lottery table to determine the winning number. Then, the value of the data pointer for small role / replay and the value of the data pointer for bonus are acquired (S89).

  After executing the processing in step S88 or step S89, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12) and sets the internal winning combination based on the value of the small combination / replay data pointer. A role is acquired (S90).

  In the process of step S90, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and data indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the small combination / replay data pointer acquired in the processing of step S88 or step S89. The value is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S90 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 29) (S91). In the processing of step S91, the data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the processing of step S90 is stored in the internal winning combination storage area (storage areas 0 to 6).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 34) is 0 (S92). In the present embodiment, in this determination processing, it is determined whether or not “F_MB” has been carried over.

  In step S92, if the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 13) and sets the value of the bonus data pointer. Then, the internal winning combination is acquired based on (S93).

  In the process of step S93, the internal winning combination determination table for bonus is referred to, and the data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the data pointer for bonus acquired in the process of step S88 or step S89 is determined.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S93 in the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 34) (S94). In the process of step S94, when “F_MB” is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S93, bit 0 corresponding to “F_MB” in the carryover storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 34) is 0 (S95). In this determination processing, it is determined whether or not the bit 0 corresponding to “F_MB” in the carryover storage area is set to “1” in step S94.

  If it is determined in step S95 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the bit 2 corresponding to “RT1 game state” in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 35) to “2”. 1 "(S96). By the processing in step S96, the main game state is changed to the RT1 game state.

  In step S92, if it is determined that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), if it is determined in step S95 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), or the process of step S96 is performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S97).

  In the process of step S97, the data value of the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 29) is updated based on the type of the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 34). After executing the processing in step S97, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery processing.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the reel stop initialization process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (S120). Here, if it is determined that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 is the same as the small pointer / replay data pointer acquired in step S89 of the internal lottery processing shown in FIG. Is set as a rotation stop number (S121).

  In the processing of step S120, when it is determined that the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (YES), or after executing the processing of step S121, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initialization table (see FIG. 26). Then, each piece of information is obtained based on the number for stopping the torso (S122).

  In the process of step S122, the main CPU 93 determines, for example, the numbers of the stop tables used at the time of the first to third stop operations and information necessary for performing the control change in the control change process (that is, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Are stopped in a specific order, and when stopped or pressed at a specific position, information used to select the stop table again) is acquired.

  The stop table stores, directly or indirectly, information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position, and using this information, does not cause a disadvantage to the player and a limit that does not cause erroneous winning. Is configured to stop at a stop position intended by the developer.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in each storage area of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 31) (S123), stores 3 in the stop button inactivity counter (S124), and sets the reel stop initialization. The process ends.

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing reel rotation start processing executed in step S18 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 110.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a reel lock effect has been set (S130). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a bit (flag) corresponding to a reel lock effect in the torso effect flag storage area is set.

  In the process of step S130, when it is determined that the reel lock effect is set (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a turning effect based on the set reel lock effect (S131).

  Here, the main CPU 93 that executes the reel lock effect when a predetermined spinning effect condition is satisfied constitutes a reel effect means.

  After executing the process of step S131, the main CPU 93 executes a random acceleration process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 93 randomly determines the time at which each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts to rotate, and starts the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the determined time.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the flags in the used torso effect flag storage area (S133), and ends the reel rotation start processing.

  In the process of step S130, when it is determined that the flag for the reel lock effect is not set in the spinner effect flag storage area (NO), the main CPU 93 executes a normal acceleration process (S134), The rotation start processing ends.

  In this process, the main CPU 93 executes a normal acceleration process for simultaneously starting the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

<Purchase priority storage processing>
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the pull-in priority storage processing executed in step S20 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 110 and step S224 of the reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S170).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a search target reel determination process for determining a search target reel (S171). In this processing, of the reels being rotated, for example, one reel on the left side is determined as a reel to be searched.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 117 (S172). This attraction priority table selection process selects one attraction priority table number from the attraction priority table (see FIG. 28).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the symbol check count stored in the main RAM 95 to 21 (the number of symbols on each reel), and sets the search symbol position to 0 (S173).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storage process shown in FIG. 118 (S174). In this symbol code storing process, the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 30) based on the acquired design code and the design code storage area (see FIG. 31) (S175).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S176). In the pull-in priority data acquisition process, in step S172, the combination in which the corresponding bit is 1 in the display combination storage area and the corresponding bit is 1 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 29) is determined in step S172. With reference to the information of the selected pull-in priority table number, the pull-in priority data is acquired.

  In the pull-in priority data acquisition process, “stop prohibited” (000H) is set for a symbol position that results in an erroneous prize when stopped, and no internal prize is won. For the symbol position, “stoppable” (00EH) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the reel to be searched (S177).

  Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the symbol check count and adds 1 to the searched symbol position (S178).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S179). Here, if it is determined that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S174.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of symbol checks is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S180). Here, when it is determined that the search for the number of times of the search has been performed (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storing process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the search for the number of times of the search has not been performed (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S171.

<Purchase priority table selection processing>
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the pull-in priority table selection process executed in step S172 of the pull-in priority storing process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S190). Here, when it is determined that the pull-in priority table selection data is set (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 33) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 32). Then, a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection data is set from the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 27) (S191), and the pull-in priority table selection process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pull-in priority table selection data is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority table corresponding to the pull-in priority table number (S192), and The selection processing ends.

<Symbol code storage processing>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the symbol code storing process executed in step S174 of the pull-in priority storing process shown in FIG. 116 and in step S220 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S200). In this embodiment, one effective line (middle-middle-middle) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the valid line data (S201). In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of the left reel 3L, the middle symbol position is set as the symbol position data for checking.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S202), and ends the symbol code storage process.

<Reel stop control processing>
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed in step S21 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S210). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal has been output from the stop switch of the stop switch board 80. When determining that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S210.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 93 stores a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 33) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 32) according to the pressed stop button. (See S211).

  Here, the main CPU 93 stores the type of the operation stop button corresponding to each of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation in the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 33). , The pressing order of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R can be determined.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S212), determines a reel to be searched from the operation stop button (S213), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S213). S214). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the relevant reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S215). The number-of-slide-pieces determination process is a process of determining the number of slide pieces specified at the stop start position according to a stop table selection data group selected based on the internal winning combination from the reel stop initialization table (see FIG. 26). It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a priority lock-in control process shown in FIG. 120 (S216). The priority pull-in control process is performed such that the pull-in priority data of the symbol of the number of sliding pieces acquired in step S215 stops at the symbol position corresponding to the higher pull-in priority data within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces. This is a process for correcting the number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S217). . The reel stop command data indicates the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding frames determination data (or the expected stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines the expected stop position of the search target reel based on the stop start position and the number-of-slide-pieces determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 95 (S218). The expected stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and a symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the expected stop position as a search symbol position (S219).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storage process (see FIG. 118) (S220). Here, the bit of the combination (combination of symbols) that can be displayed is updated to 1, and the bit of the combination (combination of symbols) that is not displayed is updated to 0.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S221).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S222). In this control change process, the reel stop information group is updated when it is at a specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S223). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority order storage process (see FIG. 116) (S224), and executes a process of step S210.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control processing.

<Priority attraction control processing>
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the priority pull-in control processing executed in step S216 of the reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S230).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the stop start position stored in the main RAM 95 (S231).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB gaming state is in operation (S232). In this determination process, when bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 35) is “1”, it is determined that the MB gaming state is in operation, and when bit 0 is “0”, MB is determined. It is determined that the gaming state is not operating.

  Here, if it is determined that the MB gaming state is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel determined in step S213 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119 is the left reel 3L. It is determined whether or not it is (S233).

  If it is determined in step S232 that the MB gaming state is not operating (NO), or if it is determined in step S233 that the search target reel is not the left reel 3L (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop control processing. A priority order table (see FIG. 24) corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data determined in step S215 is set (S234).

  For example, if the number of sliding pieces determined by the stop table (stop data table) is 4, the sliding piece number determination data of the priority order table is set to the four rows (addresses).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 to the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S235). That is, it is determined that the search is performed five times from 0 to 4 frames.

  If it is determined in step S233 that the search target reel is the left reel 3L (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the MB gaming state priority order table (see FIG. 25) according to the sliding piece number determination data. (S236).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the initial value of the priority order to 3, and sets the number of checks to 2 (S237).

  After executing the processing of step S235 or step S237, the main CPU 93 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S239).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires pull-in priority data of the stop search position (S240).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in the process of step S240 is equal to or higher than the previously-acquired pull-in priority data (S241).

  Here, if it is determined that the pull-in priority data acquired in the process of step S241 is equal to or higher than the previously-acquired pull-in priority data (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the number of sliding symbols (S242). .

  In step S241, when it is determined that the pull-in priority data acquired in the process of step S240 is not equal to or higher than the previously-acquired pull-in priority data (NO), or after executing the process of step S242, the main CPU 93 executes the priority process. One is subtracted from each of the order and the number of checks (S243).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is 0 (S244). Here, when it is determined that the number of checks is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the number of sliding frames (S245), and ends the priority pull-in control process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the number of checks is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S239.

<Bonus end check process>
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the bonus end check processing executed in step S25 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 110.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S280). In this process, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 35) is “1”, it is determined that the MB is operating, and when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “0”. It is determined that the MB is not operating.

  Here, when it is determined that the MB is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the MB is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a CB end process (S281). In this CB ending process, bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is reset to “0”. That is, during the MB operation, the operation and the end of the CB are repeated until the payout of the medals reaches the bonus end number.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the bonus end number counter indicating the remaining payout number (S282), and determines whether the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (S283).

  Here, when it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 performs MB end processing (S284). In the MB end processing, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is reset to “0”.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end command transmission process (S285), and ends the bonus end check process. In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus end command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. Here, the bonus end command data indicates, for example, that the bonus has ended.

<Bonus operation check process>
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the bonus operation check processing executed in step S26 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 110.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S290). In this process, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “1”, it is determined that the MB is operating, and when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “0”, MB is determined. It is determined that it is not operating.

  Here, when it is determined that the MB operation is being performed (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a CB operation process (S291), and ends the bonus operation check process. In the CB operation process, bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the MB is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the MB has won (S292).

  Here, when it is determined that the MB has won (YES), the main CPU 93 executes an MB operation process (S293). In the MB operation process, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”, 30 is set to the bonus end number counter, and bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S294), executes a bonus start command transmission process (S295), and ends the bonus operation check process. In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus start command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95.

  If it is determined in step S292 that no MB has been won (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether replay has been displayed (S296).

  If it is determined that the replay has not been displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the replay is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 issues an automatic insertion request for copying the value of the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter (S297), and ends the bonus operation check processing.

<Interrupt processing under control of main CPU>
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S300).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an input port check process shown in FIG. 124 (S301). In this process, the main CPU 93 confirms the presence or absence of a signal transmitted to the sub control circuit 101.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores input state command data representing on-edge / off-edge information of various switches, including on-edges and off-edges of the start switch 79 and the stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R, etc., in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. Store.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a timer update process (S302).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an effect timer updating process (S303).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel control process for controlling the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S304). More specifically, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in response to a request to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, that is, starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at a constant speed. Control is performed so that 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate. In addition, the main CPU 93 controls the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the stop operation to stop in response to the stop operation.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lamp / 7-segment driving process (S305). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units.

  Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S306), and ends the interrupt processing that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S301 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93.

  First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S310).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the previous interrupt, that is, the state of the input port one interrupt before, in the main RAM 95 (S311), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 95 (S312).

  As described above, by comparing the state of the input port before one interrupt with the current state of the input port, the main CPU 93 can confirm the state of both input ports. , And it is checked whether the state of the input port has changed, for example, whether the BET button 22 has been pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S313). In the present embodiment, the on-edge refers to a state where the button is kept pressed, and the off-edge refers to a state where the button is released.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates input state command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated input state command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S314). Then, the input port check processing ends.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 at the time of power-on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S320). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs an error check on the sub RAM 103 and the like and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, a sound control task, which is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, and a mother task shown in FIG. 128, which is a task group for VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 126 (S321). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to the timer interrupt event message, This is a process for executing a process for controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 127 (S322). In the sound control task, the state of sound output from the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (S323) and terminates the power-on process. The mother task is a task group of VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interruption synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interruption signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when one frame of video is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task started in step S321 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 125.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a lamp-related data initialization process (S331).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt wait (S332). In this process, until the sub CPU 102 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization.

  As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of the command reception interrupt synchronization. In addition, a task group (not shown) for power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like are given.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 127 (S333). In this processing, the task having the next priority to the task group of the timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the priority of the task group of the timer interrupt synchronization is basically the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S333, the sound control task having the next priority to the lamp control task is executed. In step S333, the processes of steps S342 and S343 of the sound control task shown in FIG. 127 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a lamp data analysis process (S334), executes a lamp effect execution process (S335), and executes a process of step S332.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the sound control task started in step S322 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 125.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of initializing sound-related data related to a sound output state from the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the task having the next priority to the task group of the timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S341).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sound data analysis process (S342), performs a sound effect execution process (S343), and executes the process of step S341.

<Mother task>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the mother task started in step S323 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 starts the main task (S350), starts the main board communication task (S351), and starts the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the main task started in step S350 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes a VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S360), and waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process (S362), and executes the process of step S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task started in step S351 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization of the communication message queue (S370), and checks the received command (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a command different from the previous command has been received (S372). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is a regular command, creates game information from the received command, and creates the game information. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S373). Next, the sub CPU executes the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 131 (S374), and executes the processing of step S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing executed in step S374 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 133 (S380), executes the lamp data determination processing (S381), executes the sound data determination processing (S382), and registers the determined data. Then (S383), the command analysis processing ends.

<Animation task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the animation task started in step S352 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game information updated by the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG. 123 is the same as the game information registered in the sub RAM 103 in the previous interrupt processing. It is checked whether or not the game information is different.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an object control process (S391). Specifically, when a check result indicating that the game information has changed is obtained in step S390, the sub CPU 102 controls an image according to the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes an animation task management process (S392). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects and the like. After executing the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S390.

<Direction content decision processing>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination processing executed in step S380 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether an initialization command has been received (S400). Here, when it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processing at the time of receiving the initialization command (S401), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command receiving process, for example, the effect mode data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command and the setting change normal mode reference table (see FIG. 38) are referred to based on the reception of the initialization command. The table is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S402). Here, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command receiving process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process of receiving a medal insertion command, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a medal insertion command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S404). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 134 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving a start command, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received (S406). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processing at the time of reception of the reel rotation start command (S407), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a reel stop command has been received (S408). Here, when it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a process at the time of receiving the reel stop command (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, for example, the type of the stopped reel, the stop start position, the number of sliding symbols, or the expected stop position is transmitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S410). Here, when it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command (S411), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the processing at the time of winning operation command reception, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a bonus start command has been received (S412). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a process at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus start command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a bonus end command has been received (S414). Here, when it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a process at the time of receiving the bonus end command (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command, for example, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input state command has been received (S416). Here, when it is determined that the input state command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processing at the time of receiving the input state command (S417), and ends the effect content determination processing.

  In the input state command reception process, for example, the main CPU 93 transmits, as an input state command, whether each operation unit is in the on-edge state or the off-edge state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S416 that the input state command has not been received (NO), sub CPU 102 terminates the effect content determination processing.

<Start command reception processing>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start command receiving process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 133. In the following description, setting a state (flag, value) in a storage area (counter) means that a bit corresponding to a state (flag) to be set in the storage area is set to “1” (on), and (Flag, value).

  First, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random number value and stores the extracted effect random number value in the effect random number storage area of the sub RAM 103 (S420). Next, the sub CPU 102 stores an AT winning information storage area, a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag storage area, a pseudo bonus during ART lottery winning flag storage area, a pseudo bonus in pseudo pseudo bonus addition state lottery winning flag storage area, Is initialized (S421). Here, the flag stored in each of the winning storage areas is set when a predetermined lottery executed in each control process by the sub CPU 102 described later wins.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area is the normal game state (S422). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines that the normal game state is set. If it has been performed (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the normal middle process (S423), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. Here, in the normal middle process, the sub CPU 102 determines the process related to the transition of the game state such as the normal pseudo bonus type lottery process (see step S442) and the normal precursor game number lottery process (see step S457), and the probability state. The normal high-accuracy transition game number lottery process to be determined (see step S460) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S422 that the normal gaming state has not been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first AT state has been set in the auxiliary gaming state storage area ( S424). In this process, if it is determined that the first AT state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the process during the first AT state (S425), and ends the start command receiving process. . Here, in the processing during the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state in which the order of pushing the eight bells is executed during the first AT state number of games.

  If it is determined in the process of step S424 that the first AT state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the second AT state is set in the sub game state storage area. (S426). In this process, if it is determined that the second AT state has been set (YES), sub CPU 102 executes the process during the second AT state (S427), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. . Here, in the processing during the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 executes the pressing order navigation of the eight-bell role during the second AT state game number, and performs different effects depending on the selected AT continuation type. Execute the second AT state to be executed.

  If it is determined in the process of step S426 that the second AT state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion game state is set in the sub game state storage area. (S428). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion game state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus promotion game state process (S429), and ends the start command receiving process. Here, in the pseudo bonus promotion game state process, the sub CPU 102 randomly determines whether or not the winning pseudo bonus state is promoted to a more advantageous pseudo bonus state for the player.

  If it is determined in the process of step S428 that the pseudo bonus promotion game state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo bonus shift state is set in the sub game state storage area. (S430). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus shift state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus shift process (S431), and ends the start command receiving process. Here, in the pseudo bonus transfer processing, the sub CPU 102 executes the lottery for shifting to the special pseudo bonus state and the promotion lottery of the won pseudo bonus state until the sub bonus 102 is won. This is a gaming state in which a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is executed when a winning combination is won.

  If it is determined in the process of step S430 that the pseudo bonus transition state has not been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo bonus state has been set in the sub game state storage area (S432). ). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus state has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus process (S433), and ends the start command receiving process. Here, in the pseudo bonus mid-process, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus state of executing a push order navigation for winning the predetermined number of eight bells. In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus state has not been set (NO), sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

<Normal medium processing>
135 and 136 are flowcharts showing the normal processing executed in step S423 of the start command receiving processing shown in FIG. 134.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S440). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous normal middle process.

  If it is determined in the process of step S440 that the pseudo bonus type 0 has been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 increments the pseudo bonus ceiling counter by 1 (S441). Here, the pseudo bonus ceiling counter is a counter for counting the number of unit games when the pseudo bonus state has not been won, and when the counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 600), the next normal pseudo simulation is performed. In the bonus type lottery, a normal pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 46 (d)) which always wins one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is referred to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal-time pseudo bonus type lottery process (S442). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines a normal pseudo bonus lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 46A to 46D) based on the currently selected probability state and the value of the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. The pseudo bonus type lottery process is executed with reference to the determined normal pseudo bonus lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S443). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S444). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442.

  If it is determined in the process of step S444 that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes a pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S445). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter since the pseudo bonus state has been won in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery process (S446). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the normal mode and the probability state determined by referring to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 39) based on the currently set AT state non-winning number and the selected table. The CPU determines a normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table to be referred to (see each of (a) to (c) in FIGS. 52 to 54), and refers to the determined normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table to determine the ART. Execute the lottery process.

  As shown in steps S444 and S446, when the pseudo bonus state is won, an ART lottery process is executed to determine whether to shift to the AT state, a loop rate as a continuation probability of continuing the AT state, and an AT state. The sub CPU 102 that determines the number of sets as the number of continuations for continuing is formed by a specific effect state transition lottery means, a continuation probability determination means, and a continuation number determination means. Here, the sub CPU 102 is configured to execute the ART lottery at the time of the pseudo bonus winning in each process described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S447). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery executed in step S446 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART win set in the ART win storage area is an AT win (S448). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning has been won in the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery executed in step S446.

  In the process of step S448, if it is determined that AT is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns off the first AT state game number additional lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus (S449). Here, the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus determines whether or not to execute the first AT state game number addition lottery in the pseudo bonus middle processing (see FIGS. 141 and 142). This is a flag to perform

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the AT state non-winning number counter (S450). In this process, the sub CPU 102 wins the normal pseudo bonus type lottery in step S442 and does not win the AT state in the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery in step S446. The stored AT state non-winning number counter is incremented by one.

  In this way, in the ART lottery at the time of winning the pseudo bonus state, the sub RAM 103 that stores the number of times that the AT state is not won in the AT state non-winning number counter constitutes a non-winning number storage unit.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal mode number determination process (S451), and sets a normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number (S452). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 determines the normal mode number from the currently selected table and the value stored in the AT state non-winning number counter with reference to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 39). Then, the normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number is set in the normal mode storage area.

  Here, in the normal mode reference table, as described above, the AT state non-winning number is a specific number defined for each table (for example, 9 for table A and 4 for table W). In this case, the normal modes 4 and 5 are set in the normal mode storage area by the sub CPU 102.

  Then, when the normal modes 4 and 5 are set, the sub CPU 102 performs the normal lottery processing at the time of selection of the normal normal modes 4 and 5 (not shown) in the normal lottery processing at the time of the normal bonus mode winning at step S46. With reference to the table, ART lottery is executed. Here, the normal lottery table at the time of selecting the normal mode 4 or 5 when the pseudo bonus state is selected is a probability table in which a lottery value is associated so that the ART win or not always wins the AT win number at which the AT state is won. is there.

  That is, the sub CPU 102 is configured to shift the sub game state to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends when the AT non-winning number reaches a specific number and the pseudo bonus state is won.

  As a result, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts the sub game state to the AT state when the number of non-winning ART lotteries becomes a specific number and the shift to the pseudo bonus state is determined. Because of this, it is possible to avoid a permanent increase in the loop rate and the number of sets, suppress unnecessary losses on the game store side, and allow a player to play a game while maintaining a proper gambling spirit be able to.

  In the process of step S448, if it is determined that an AT win has occurred (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus (S453). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal flag as the AT status flag (S454). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal flag in the AT status flag storage area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of steps S452 and S454 or in the processing of step S444, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value set in the precursor counter is It is determined whether the value is 0 (S455). Here, the precursor counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, and stores the number of precursor games.

  If it is determined in step S455 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S456).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S455 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a normal-time precursor game number lottery process (S457). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus state is won, whether or not the ART is valid when the pseudo bonus state is won, the currently set normal mode and the probability state, and the normal time precursor game number lottery table (FIG. 89 to FIG. 89). 94 is determined, and the normal-time precursor game number lottery process of determining the precursor game number is executed with reference to the determined normal-time precursor game number lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the normal-time precursor game number lottery executed in step S457 in the precursor counter (S458).

  After executing the processing of step S456 or step S458, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S459). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442.

  If it is determined in the process of step S459 that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a high-probability transition game number lottery process (S460). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines a high-probability transition game number lottery table to be referred to (see (a) to (d) in FIGS. 42 to 44) based on the currently set normal mode and probability state. Then, referring to the determined high-probability transition game number lottery table, a high-probability transition game for determining the probability state and the number of games in each probability state when the high-probability or ultra-high-probability state is selected as the probability state. A number lottery process is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value currently set in the high-accuracy counter and the ultra-high-accuracy counter (S461), and outputs the result of the high-accuracy transition game number random determination executed in step S460 to the corresponding high-accuracy counter. Then, it is set in the super high accuracy counter (S462). Here, the high-accuracy counter and the ultra-high-accuracy counter are counters stored in predetermined areas of the sub-RAM 103, respectively. Stores the number of games executed. In addition, by executing the processing of step S462 after the execution of the processing of step S461, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of highly accurate games and the number of ultra-highly accurate games determined in the processing of step S460 without subtracting the number of highly accurate games and the number of highly accurate games. Can be set to an ultra-high accuracy counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal state in the sub game state storage area, and ends the normal processing.

  If it is determined in step S459 that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value set in the precursor counter is 0 or not. A determination is made (S464). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the state transition common process at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 139 (S465). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of determining a sub game state of the next game when the precursor state ends.

  After executing the processing of step S465 or in the processing of step S464, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the high-precision counter and the ultra-high-precision counter to Initialization (S466), the normal middle process ends.

  In the process of step S440, if it is determined that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the precursor process (S467), and ends the normal process. . In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state for executing the promotion lottery.

<Common processing after ART lottery>
FIG. 137 is a step S447 of the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, a step S493 of the precursor middle processing shown in FIG. 138, and steps S538, FIG. 143, and FIG. 144 of the pseudo bonus middle processing shown in FIGS. 145 of the pseudo bonus process, step S600 of the pre-start processing of the first AT state shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, and steps S639 and 149 of the processing during the first AT state shown in FIGS. 147 and 148. 151 in step S679 and step S682 of the processing during the second AT state shown in FIG. 151, step S737 of the processing at the end of the second AT state shown in FIG. 153, and step S762 of the processing during the pseudo bonus promotion game state shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the common process after ART random determination performed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART success / failure in the ART success / failure storage area (S470). In this process, among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery, information on the ART success / failure is set in the ART success / failure storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the loop rate at the end of the loop reference stock table (S471). In this process, among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery, information relating to the loop rate is set at the end of the loop reference stock table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART set number in the loop stock counter (S472). In this process, among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery, information on the number of ART sets is stored in a loop stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of special mode 6 sets in the special mode 6 stock counter (S473), and ends the common processing after the ART lottery. In this processing, among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common processing after the ART lottery, information relating to the number of special mode 6 sets is stored in a special mode 6 stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. I do.

<Precursor processing>
FIG. 138 shows the processing during step S467 of the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the step S623 of the processing during the first AT state shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, and the processing during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. It is a flowchart which shows the precursory process performed in step S707 of a process.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S480). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table (see FIG. 3) based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. 47 (see (a) to (e)), a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, and the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is stored in the sub RAM 103. It is set in a pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in a predetermined area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery has been won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S480.

  In the process of step S481, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S482). . In this processing, since the sub CPU 102 has won the promotion lottery, the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table to the pseudo bonus type won in the promotion lottery, and is currently winning. The pseudo bonus type is promoted to the pseudo bonus type determined by the promotion lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 5 (S483). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not 5 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 6. (S484).

  If it is determined in the process of step S483 that the pseudo bonus type 5 is set (YES), or if it is determined in the process of step S484 that the pseudo bonus type 6 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 Turns on the pseudo bonus promotion game state flag (S485). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion game state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S485 or in the processing of step S484, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not the pseudo bonus type 6 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag ( S486). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S486 or in the process of step S481, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning has not been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus type lottery process during the pseudo bonus winning. (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a lottery process as to whether or not to win the pseudo bonus type 8 as the pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S487 (S488). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the precursor counter (S489).

  In the process of step S488, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the precursor counter (S490), and places the pseudo bonus type 8 at the top of the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is set (S491). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 can set the pseudo bonus type 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table while stocking the winning pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning (S492). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART random determination process with reference to the pseudo bonus ART random determination table during pseudo bonus winning (see FIG. 55).

  Next, the sub CPU executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART random determination at the time of the pseudo bonus winning executed in the step S492 in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART win set in the ART win storage area is an AT win (S494). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning has been won in the ART lottery during the pseudo bonus winning during the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S492.

  In the process of step S494, if it is determined that an AT win has been achieved (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus (S495).

  After executing the processing of step S489 and step S495 or in the processing of step S494, if it is determined that the AT is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 checks whether the value stored in the precursor counter is 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S496). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor process.

  If it is determined in step S496 that the value stored in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the state transition common process at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 139 (S497). , The pre-symbol processing ends.

<Status transition common processing at the end of precursor>
FIG. 139 is a step S465 of the normal middle processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, a step S497 of the middle precursor processing shown in FIG. 138, and steps S655 and S149 of the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148. 151 is a flowchart showing the state transition common processing at the end of the precursor executed in step S700 of the second processing during the AT state shown in FIG. 151.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S500). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub game state storage area (S501), and the state transition at the end of the precursor is common. The process ends.

  As described above, when the pseudo bonus type 8 is set, the sub CPU 102 is configured to directly shift the sub game state from the precursor state to the pseudo bonus state without going through the pseudo bonus transition state.

  In the process of step S500, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is ON (S502). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag (S503), and the sub CPU 102 stores the pseudo bonus promotion state storage area in the sub game state storage area. The bonus promotion game state is set (S504), and the state transition common processing at the end of the precursor is ended.

  In this way, if the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is set, that is, if it is determined to transition to the pseudo bonus promotion game state, the sub game state is changed to the pseudo bonus promotion game state after the precursor state ends. The sub CPU 102 to be shifted constitutes a third specific effect state shifting means.

  In the process of step S502, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub game state storage area (S505), and the precursor ends. The state transition common process at time ends.

<Pseudo bonus transfer process>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus transfer processing executed in step S431 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 134.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect based on the pseudo bonus reference table (see FIG. 45) (S510). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect, refers to the pseudo bonus reference table, and performs a pseudo bonus state effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus type that has been won. For example, when the pseudo bonus type 1 is set in the pseudo bonus type stock table, an effect of the same color red pseudo bonus state is executed with reference to the pseudo bonus reference table.

  Further, when the pressing order bell is won, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table and the effect game state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. The pseudo-bonus determination screen navigation lottery table (see each of (a) to (e) in FIGS. 49 and 50) is determined, and by referring to the determined pseudo-bonus determination screen navigation lottery table, the pressing order for winning the eight-bell role is determined. Execute the lottery of the navigation.

  For example, when the pseudo bonus type 1 is set and the effect gaming state 0 is stored in the main RAM 95, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus determination screen navigation lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery of the push order navigation for winning the single-page bell is executed.

  Here, when the sub CPU 102 executes the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role, the main CPU 93 shifts the effect game state to the effect game state 1 when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state. be able to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the normal replay, which is a pseudo bonus transfer combination, has been won (S511). In this process, if it is determined that the normal replay has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table and the effect game stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Based on the state, determine the pseudo-bonus determination screen navigation lottery table to be referred to, refer to the determined pseudo-bonus determination screen navigation lottery table, execute the pressing order navigation lottery, the result of the pressing order navigation lottery is: It is determined whether or not the pressing order navigation causes the first stop operation to be executed by a button other than the left stop button 19L (S512).

  In the process of step S512, if it is determined that the push order navigation that causes the first stop operation to be performed by a button other than the left stop button 19L has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the dummy stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. The bonus shift flag is turned on (S513).

  After executing the processing in step S513, if it is determined in step S511 that the winning combination is not the normal replay (NO), or in the processing in step S512, the first stop operation is performed by the left stop button 19L. Is determined (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S514).

  In the processing of step S514, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (See (a) to (e) in FIGS. 47 and 48), execute the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process with reference to the determined pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, and A pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 103 is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S515). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion bonus lottery has been won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S514.

  In the process of step S515, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S516). Then, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is turned ON (S517).

  After executing the process of step S517 or in the process of step S515, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus type lottery process during the pseudo bonus winning. (S518). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a lottery process as to whether or not to win the pseudo bonus type 8 as the pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S518 (S519). In this processing, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus transfer processing.

  In the process of step S519, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 8 at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table (S520). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 can set the pseudo bonus type 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table while stocking the winning pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning (S521). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART random determination process with reference to the pseudo bonus ART random determination table during pseudo bonus winning (see FIG. 55).

  Next, the sub CPU executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART random determination at the time of the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S521 in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus (S523), sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub game state storage area (S524), and ends the pseudo bonus transfer processing. I do.

<Processing during pseudo bonus>
FIGS. 141 and 142 are flowcharts showing the pseudo bonus process executed in step S433 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (S530). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is 0.

  If it is determined in step S530 that the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter based on the pseudo bonus reference table (see FIG. 45). (S531). In this processing, since the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus state, refers to the pseudo bonus reference table, and executes the sub game. The value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter corresponding to the pseudo bonus type is set.

  After executing the processing of step S531 or in the processing of step S530, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role. It is determined whether or not to execute (S532). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the push order navigation for winning the eight-page bell combination when the push order bell is won with reference to a probability table (not shown).

  In the process of step S532, if it is determined that the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is to be executed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter (S533). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter since the pressing order navigation for winning the eight-bell role has been executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the notification timing flag is ON (S534). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the notification timing flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 has been set. Here, the notification timing flag determines that when the first and second pseudo bonus selection effects are selected by the player, the notification that the AT state has been won at the notification timing determined by lottery is performed. This flag is set in the case.

  If it is determined in the process of step S534 that the notification timing flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter and the value stored in the notification timing counter are: Are determined to be the same (S535). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the notification timing of notifying that the AT state has been won has come due to the execution of the pressing order navigation for winning the eight-page bell combination in step S532.

  In the process of step S535, if it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter and the value stored in the notification timing counter are the same (YES), the sub CPU 102 enters the AT state. An AT state notification effect for notifying the winning is executed (S536). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes an AT state notification effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player. For example, when the player selects the first pseudo bonus selection effect, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state notification effect.

  By the processing of steps S535 and S536, when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined and the ART lottery is won, the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment selects the pseudo bonus state before the start of the pseudo bonus state by the player. In the first AT state notification effect as a notification mode based on the performed pseudo bonus selection effect, the fact that the AT win is set in the ART win / fail storage area as the ART win / fail is notified at the notification timing determined by lottery. Therefore, the player can imagine the future development of the game, etc., based on the effect content notified according to the selected pseudo bonus selection effect and the timing at which the first AT state notification effect is executed. As well as expanding the range of strategies, it is possible to increase interest in game development.

  In this way, the sub CPU 102 executing the AT state notification effect in the notification mode based on the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player in the state where the AT state is won constitutes a winning notification unit.

  After executing the processing of step S536, if it is determined in step S532 that the push order navigation for winning the eight-page bell is not executed (NO), the notification timing flag is OFF in the processing of step S534. When it is determined (NO) or in the process of step S535, it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter and the value stored in the notification timing counter are different values (NO). The sub CPU 102 executes the ART random determination process during the pseudo bonus (S537). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to refer to the ART during the pseudo bonus (see (a) in FIG. 56 to FIG. 58, based on the ART bonus and the pseudo bonus color type stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103). (B) is determined, and the ART random determination process is executed with reference to the determined ART random determination table during the pseudo bonus.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S538). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART random determination during the pseudo bonus executed in step S537 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag is ON during the pseudo bonus (S539). In this process, if it is determined that the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag is ON during the pseudo bonus (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the first AT state game number addition lottery process during the pseudo bonus. Execute (S540). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the first AT state game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b)) to be referred based on the ART success / failure, and determines the determined first AT state. A first AT state game number to be added is determined by lottery with reference to the game number added lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number determined to be added as a result of the processing in step S540 to the first AT state game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (S541). In this process, when the AT state is won, the sub CPU 102 can add the first AT state game number by lottery.

  After executing the processing of step S541 or in the processing of step S539, if it is determined that the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag is OFF during the pseudo bonus (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus A pseudo bonus addition state lottery process is executed (S542). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines, by referring to a probability table (not shown), whether or not the pseudo bonus addition state has been won by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus added state lottery during the pseudo bonus executed in the process of step S542 is won (S543). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus added lottery during the pseudo bonus has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus added state stock counter (S544). In this process, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus added state stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 increments the pseudo bonus additional counter by one (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 102 is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 because it has won the pseudo bonus addition lottery during the pseudo bonus, that is, has won the pseudo bonus addition state in which at least one AT win is added. During the pseudo bonus, one is added to the pseudo bonus extra counter, which is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the ART lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus addition state lottery winning flag during the pseudo bonus (S546). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus added state lottery winning flag during the pseudo bonus stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S546 or in the processing of step S543, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus addition lottery during the pseudo bonus has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT during the pseudo bonus has the AT It is determined whether or not the state has been won (S547). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning has been won in the pseudo bonus during ART lottery process executed in step S537.

  In the process of step S547, if it is determined that the AT state has been won (YES), the pseudo bonus additional counter is incremented by 1 (S548). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 increments the pseudo bonus additional counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 by one.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the lottery permission flag for adding the number of games in the first AT state during the pseudo bonus (S549). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART lottery winning flag during the pseudo bonus (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo-bonus ART lottery winning flag that identifies that an AT winning number associated with the AT winning has been won in the pseudo-bonus ART lottery process executed in step S537.

  After executing the processing of step S550 or in the processing of step S547, if it is determined that the AT state has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 has a value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter of 0. It is determined whether or not (S551). In this process, when it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S551 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the notification timing flag (S552). In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the notification timing flag since the pseudo bonus state ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus selection effect set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area is the third pseudo bonus selection effect (S553).

  In the process of step S553, when it is determined that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery process (S554). ). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes a predetermined number of push order navigations in the pseudo bonus state executed in a state in which the player has selected the third pseudo bonus selection effect and sets the pseudo bonus navigation counter. Since the value has become 0, the end effect lottery table at the time of execution of the third pseudo bonus selection effect is referred to (see FIG. 107) to notify that the pseudo bonus state has ended, and to set from the next game. By suggesting the normal mode to be performed, in the next normal-time pseudo-bonus-winning ART lottery, the normal-time pseudo-bonus-winning ART lottery table to be referred to (see (a) to (c) in FIGS. 52 to 54). ) Is determined.

  With this configuration, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is based on the normal mode in which any one of the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables is set from the plurality of normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables. In order to execute the ART lottery based on the selected normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table at the time of selection, the probability of transition to the AT state differs depending on the set normal mode, and the third pseudo bonus selection effect is selected. In this case, the effect indicating the set normal mode is executed at the end of the pseudo bonus state, so that it is possible to easily predict the progress of the game.

  After executing the process of step S554 or in the process of step S553, if it is determined that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus end process ( S555), and terminates the processing during the pseudo bonus. In this processing, the sub CPU 102 terminates the pseudo bonus state and executes processing for determining the effect content in the next game.

  Here, the sub CPU 102 executes the during-AT pseudo-bonus-type lottery process executed during the AT state (step S625 of the first during-AT-state process shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 and the second CPU shown in FIGS. 149 to 151). If the pseudo bonus types 1 to 6 are won and the first to fourth pseudo bonus states are executed in the process during the AT state (see step S666 of the processing during the AT state), the processing of step S555 that is the end of the pseudo bonus state is performed when the first to fourth pseudo bonus states are executed. At the time of execution, a special mode suggestion effect that is an effect indicating the special mode set in the special mode storage area is executed. Here, the details of the special mode suggestion effect will be described later.

  As described above, in the AT state, it is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state, and the determined pseudo bonus state is set to the sub game state, and is set in the special mode storage area at the end of the determined pseudo bonus state. The sub CPU 102 that executes a special mode effect that indicates a special mode that is present constitutes a special mode suggestion effect execution unit when the pseudo special game state ends.

<Process at the end of pseudo bonus>
FIGS. 143 and 144 are flowcharts showing the pseudo-bonus end processing executed in step S555 of the pseudo-bonus middle processing shown in FIGS. 141 and 142.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added stock navigation counter (S560). Here, the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, and is used when a pseudo bonus type 8 associated with the special pseudo bonus state is won during the pseudo bonus added state. , The value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter at the time of winning.

  In the process of step S560, if it is determined that a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus added state to the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter. The stored value is stored, and the stock bonus counter with the pseudo bonus added is initialized (S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 associated with the pseudo bonus added state in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S562), and ends the pseudo bonus end processing. In these processes, the sub CPU 102 restarts the pseudo bonus added state that was being executed from the next game since the special pseudo bonus state won during the pseudo bonus added state has ended.

  In the process of step S560, if it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus added stock navigation counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is determined to be the pseudo bonus type 7 (S563). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the executed pseudo bonus state is a pseudo bonus added state.

  In the process of step S563, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is the pseudo bonus type 7 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus added state guarantee lottery process (S564). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the value stored in the pseudo bonus addition counter and the ART bonus lottery table at the time of execution of the pseudo bonus addition state (see FIG. 88), and sets one set of AT states in the pseudo bonus addition state. If not stocked, a process of stocking one set is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S565). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus additional state guarantee lottery executed in step S564 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  After executing the processing of step S565 or in the processing of step S563, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not the pseudo bonus type 7 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus additional counter (S566). ). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus additional counter since the pseudo bonus state has ended.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter (S567). In this process, in the pseudo bonus state, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus added state has been won and stocked.

  In the process of step S567, if it is determined that a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 in the pseudo bonus type stock table ( (S568), the pseudo bonus added state stock counter is decremented by 1 (S569), the pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub game state storage area (S570), and the pseudo bonus end processing ends. In these processes, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus added state stored in the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state to be executed next, reduces the stock by one, and shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus transition state.

  If it is determined in step S567 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus added stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus type (S571). In this process, the sub CPU 102 deletes the currently executed pseudo bonus type from the pseudo bonus type stock table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value at the head of the pseudo bonus type stock table is greater than 0 (S572). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type is stocked in the pseudo bonus added state stock table.

  In the process of step S572, if it is determined that the leading value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the leading value of the pseudo bonus type stock table to the pseudo bonus type. Is set (S573). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type stocked in the pseudo bonus type stock table in the pseudo bonus type stock table as the pseudo bonus type to be referred to from the next game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is ON (S574). In this processing, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub game state storage area (S575), and the pseudo bonus ends. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S574 that the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion game state in the sub game state storage area (S576). Then, the pseudo bonus promotion game state transition flag is turned off (S577), and the pseudo bonus end processing ends.

  In the process of step S572, if it is determined that the head value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART win set in the ART win storage area is AT win. It is determined whether or not it is (S578). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an AT winning number associated with the AT winning has been won in any of the ART lotteries.

  In the process of step S578, if it is determined that an AT win has occurred (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub game state storage area (S579), and performs the first AT state pre-processing. Is executed (S580). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 starts the first AT state to determine the control information for determining the contents of the effect to be executed in the first AT state starting from the next game, and to determine whether or not the AT state is continued. Perform preprocessing.

  As described above, at the time of winning the AT state, the sub CPU 102 that shifts the sub game state to the first AT state among the AT states after the pseudo bonus state ends constitutes a first specific effect state shifting means. .

  Next, the sub CPU initializes the AT state non-winning number counter (S581), and ends the pseudo bonus end processing. In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has won the AT state, the sub CPU 102 initializes the AT state non-winning number counter.

  In the process of step S578, when it is determined that AT is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes other high-probability transition game number lottery processing, and outputs the result of the lottery to a corresponding counter (a high-precision counter and a super-high counter). (S582), the normal state is set in the sub game state storage area (S583), and the pseudo bonus end processing ends. In this process, in the normal state started after the pseudo bonus state ends, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to set the probability state to be highly accurate or super accurate from the start, by a non-illustrated other high-accuracy transition game number lottery table. And is determined by lottery.

  Here, the other high-probability transition game number lottery tables are five lottery tables similar to the high-probability transition game number lottery tables (see (a) to (d) in FIGS. 42 to 44). The sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode set in the normal mode storage area to determine the other highly-probable transition game number lottery table to be referred to. In the other high-probability transition game number lottery table, each probability state and the number of games in which the probability state continues are associated with different lottery values for each sub game state set in the sub game state storage area. I have.

<First AT state pre-processing>
FIGS. 145 and 146 show before the start of the first AT state executed in step S580 of the pseudo bonus end processing shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 and step S738 of the second AT state end processing shown in FIG. 153. It is a flowchart which shows a process.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special mode is set in the special mode storage area (S590). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of the special modes 1 to 6 is set in the special mode stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S590 that the special mode has not been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode 1 in the special mode storage area (S591). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode 1 set in the initial state of the first AT state in the special mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 to the special table information counter (S592). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 as an initial value in a special table information counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a special table lottery process (S593), and sets the lottery result to the special table number (S594). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 determines the special table with reference to the special table lottery table (see FIG. 60), and stores the number of the determined special table in the special table stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Set to a number.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal flag in the loop lottery state (S595), sets the normal flag in the first AT state game number lottery state (S596), and sets the normal flag in the special mode lottery state. It is set (S597). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 determines a loop lottery state among the AT state flags stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, a first AT state game number lottery state, and a special mode lottery state. Set the normal flag.

  After executing the processing of step S597 or in the processing of step S590, if it is determined that the special mode is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode table with reference to the special mode table reference table. Then, the number of the determined special mode table is set to the special mode table number (S598). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode table by referring to the special mode table reference table based on the value set in the special table information counter and the value set in the special table number, The number of the determined special mode table is set to the special mode table number stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a special mode table ART lottery process at the start of the first AT state (S599). In this process, based on the flag set in the first AT state game number random determination state, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state start special mode table ART random determination table (FIG. 62 (a), (a)). b)), and determines the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table to execute the ART lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S600). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus added state guarantee lottery executed in step S599 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a first AT state game number lottery process (S601). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state game number lottery table (see FIG. 95) and determines the first AT state game number which is the number of times the unit game is executed in the first AT state. I do.

  As described above, in the first AT state pre-start processing executed when the transition from the pseudo bonus state to the first AT state is performed, the sub CPU 102 that determines the number of first AT state games is the first identification state. An effect state game number determining means is constituted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number determined as a result of the processing in step S601 to the first AT state game number counter (S602). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores the determined first AT state game number in the first AT state game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the first AT state game number lottery state (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a special mode shift lottery process at the start of the first AT state (S604). In this process, the sub-CPU 102 refers to the special mode set in the special mode storage area and the flag set in the special mode lottery state, and refers to the first AT state start special mode shift lottery table (see FIG. 63 to FIG. 71), and determines the special mode with reference to the determined special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state.

  As described above, in the second AT state, a plurality of pseudo bonus lottery tables in the second AT state having different winning probabilities for determining to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state (see FIGS. 73 to 82). When determining a pseudo bonus lottery table in the second AT state to be referred from each of (a) and (b)), the sub CPU 102 selects at least one of a plurality of special modes to be referred to as a special mode to be referred to. Constitutes special mode selection means.

  In the process of step S604, the sub CPU 102 determines a special mode, and performs a special mode suggestion effect executed in the first AT state (see FIG. 157) and a special mode notification effect executed in the second AT state. (See FIG. 158). Here, the special mode suggestion effect is an effect indicating the determined special mode. The special mode notification effect is an effect for notifying the determined special mode. The details of the special mode suggestion effect and the special mode notification effect will be described later.

  With this configuration, the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a special mode suggestion effect indicating the selected special mode in the first AT state, and selects the special mode in the second AT state. Since the special mode notification effect of notifying the special mode is executed, different effects relating to the special mode are executed in the first and second half of one AT state, and the player's expectation for the selected special mode is maintained. be able to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode determined as a result of the processing of step S601 in the special mode storage area (S605). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined special mode in the special mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the special mode lottery state (S606). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is larger than 0 (S607).

  If it is determined in step S607 that the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the special mode 6 flag (S608). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode 6 flag to ON and sets the special mode 6 in the special mode storage area. Thus, the sub CPU 102 is configured to set the special mode 6 with priority even if the other special modes 1 to 5 have already been set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 decrements the special mode 6 stock counter by one (S609). In this processing, since the special mode 6 has been set, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of the special mode 6 set in the special mode 6 stock counter.

  If it is determined in step S607 that the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns off the special mode 6 flag (S610).

  After executing the processing in step S609 or step S610, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART loop lottery processing (S611). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the flag set in the loop lottery type, the value set in the loop stock counter, the special mode set in the special mode storage area, and the set in the AT continuation type storage area. An AT loop lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 85A to 85G) is determined based on the AT continuation type that has been set, and the loop reference stock table is referred to by referring to the determined ART loop lottery table. The ART loop lottery is executed based on the loop rate set in.

  Here, when the set number is set in the loop stock counter, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (b) to determine the loop rate set in the loop reference stock table. The continuation or the special continuation is won. In addition, when referring to the ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. 85A, the sub CPU 102 is configured to win any of the no continuation, the continuation, and the special continuation according to the loop rate set in the loop reference stock table. It is configured.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 executes the continuous transition according to the number of sets stored in the loop stock counter, and when the number of sets stored in the loop stock counter is exhausted, the loop set in the loop reference stock table. It is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous transition based on the rate.

  Accordingly, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the ART lottery when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined, and sets the loop rate determined at the non-winning time when the ART lottery is not won. Since the number can be carried over until the ART lottery is won, when the ART lottery can be finally won, an increase in the loop rate or the set number of the game in the AT state can be expected, and the pseudo bonus state can be expected. Even if the AT state is not started after the end of the game, the player's interest in the game can be maintained until the ART lottery is won, and the player expects the AT state to last for a long time. To play the game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the AT continuation type determined as a result of the processing of step S611 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S612). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined AT continuation type in the AT continuation type storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the flag set in the loop lottery state is a normal flag (S613). In this process, if it is determined that the normal flag is not set in the loop lottery state (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first pre-AT state start process.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S613, when it is determined that the normal flag is set in the loop lottery state (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value stored in the loop stock counter is greater than 0. Is determined (S614). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the loop stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first pre-AT state start process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S614 that the value stored in the loop stock counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the loop stock counter. (S615), and ends the first pre-AT state start processing.

<First AT state processing>
147 and 148 are flowcharts showing the first AT state process executed in step S425 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 134.

  When performing the first AT state processing, the sub CPU 102 executes the special mode suggestion effect determined in step S604 of the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146). Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a special mode suggestion effect executing means.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART navigation lottery process (S620). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 59A and 59B) based on the effect game state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination is made. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-page bell role is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the first AT state game number counter (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S622). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous process during the first AT state.

  In the process of step S622, if it is determined that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a precursory process (S623), and during the first AT state. The process ends. In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state for executing the promotion lottery.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S622 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 increments the pseudo bonus ceiling counter by 1 (S624).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus type lottery process in the first AT state (S625). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first pseudo AT bonus state lottery table during the AT state (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) based on the during AT state set in the during AT state storage area. ) Is determined, and the pseudo bonus type lottery is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus lottery table in the first AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S625 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S626). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S627). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the first AT state executed in step S625.

  In the process of step S627, if it is determined that one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table to the pseudo bonus type 5 Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the type is the pseudo bonus type 6 (S628). In this processing, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is 5 or 6 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion game state flag (S629). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion game state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S629 or in the processing of step S628, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. (S630). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus state has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery in the first AT state executed in step S625.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the same color high accuracy counter (S631). Here, the same-color high-accuracy counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 103, and is executed with the same-color high-accuracy set when the sub CPU 102 selects the same-color high-accuracy as the probability state during AT. The number of games played is stored.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state in the first AT state game number lottery state and the special mode lottery state (S632). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state to the first AT state effect state (S633).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not no continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S634). In this processing, when it is determined that the no continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a normal flag in the loop lottery state (S635).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S634 that the no continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus continuation time flag in the first AT state to the loop lottery state. Is set (S636).

  In the processing of steps S634 to S636, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state in a state where the continuation or special continuation is set as the AT continuation type, the sub CPU 102 is executed after the end of the pseudo pseudo bonus state that has been won. In step S611 of the first pre-AT state start process (see FIGS. 145 and 146), the continuation or the special continuation is reliably won.

  After executing the processing of step S635 or step S636, the sub CPU 102 turns on the lottery permission flag for adding the first AT state game during the pseudo bonus (S637). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process at the time of the pseudo bonus during the AT state (S638). In this process, based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area and the special mode set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the AT bonus lottery table during the AT state to be referred during the AT state. 83 (see (a) and (b) in FIG. 84), and the ART random determination is executed with reference to the ART random determination table at the time of the determined pseudo bonus during the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (639). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART random determination at the time of the pseudo bonus winning in the AT state executed in step S638 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  If it is determined in step S627 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter is greater than 0. A determination is made (S640). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high certainty counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the same color high certainty counter ( S641).

  After executing the processing of step S641 or in the processing of step S640, if it is determined that the value stored in the high accuracy counter of the same color is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the same color in the first AT state. The high-accuracy transition lottery process is executed (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and sets the during-AT probability state to be set to the during-AT probability state and the same-color high-accuracy when setting the same-color high probability as the during-AT probability state. The number of games to be executed in a state where the game is performed is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high certainty shift lottery during the first AT state executed in step S642 to the corresponding same color high certainty counter (S643). In this process, if a value has already been stored in the same-color high-accuracy counter, the sub-CPU 102 adds the result of the same-color high-probability transition lottery in the first AT state executed in step S642 to the already stored value. I do.

  After executing the processing of step S639 or step S643, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S644). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (S645).

  If it is determined in step S645 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state precursor game number random determination process (S646). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes a precursor game number random determination with reference to a probability table (not shown).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number determined in step S646 is larger than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (S647). In this process, if it is determined that the value of the precursor game number determined in step S646 is larger than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 The value set in the first AT state game number counter is set in the counter (S648).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S647, if it is determined that the value of the precursor game number determined in step S646 is smaller than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (NO), The CPU 102 sets the value of the number of signs game determined in step S646 in the sign counter (S649).

  In the processing of steps S647 to S649, if the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state during the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state via a relatively small number of precursor states. I do.

  If it is determined in step S645 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 displays the BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning. It is determined whether or not to execute a possible push order navigation (S650). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines by lottery whether or not to execute a push order navigation that can display a BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning, with reference to a probability table (not shown). .

  In the process of step S650, when it is determined that the push order navigation is not performed as a result of the lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S651).

  In the process of step S644, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES), or if it is determined in the process of step S650 that the push order navigation is to be executed as a result of the lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 Initializes the precursor counter (S652).

  After executing the processing of step S648, step S649 or step S652, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S653). ). In this process, if it is determined that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. (S654). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the first AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S654 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the state transition common process at the time of precursor end shown in FIG. 139 ( S655), the first processing during the AT state is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S653 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the value set in the first AT state game number counter is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (S656). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the first AT state game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first AT state in-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S656 that the value set in the first AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the special table information counter (S657). ), The second AT state is set in the sub game state storage area (S658), and the processing during the first AT state is terminated. In these processes, since the first AT state game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines that all unit games to be executed in the first AT state have been completed, and adds 1 to the special table information counter. At the same time, the second AT state is started from the next game.

  As described above, in the first AT state, when the unit game of the first AT state number of games determined in the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146) is executed, the sub game state is changed. , The sub CPU 102 that shifts to the second AT state among the AT states constitutes a second specific effect state shift means.

<Process during second AT state>
FIG. 149 to FIG. 151 are flowcharts showing the processing during the second AT state executed in step S427 of the processing at the time of reception of the start command shown in FIG.

  When executing the second AT state process, the sub CPU 102 executes the special mode notification effect determined in step S604 of the first AT state start pre-process (see FIGS. 145 and 146). Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a special mode notification effect executing means.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (S660). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the second AT state game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is 0.

  If it is determined in step S660 that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state initial processing (S661). ). In this process, since the second AT state game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the first time the second AT state game number has not been set after the end of the first AT state. Is determined to be a game, and a second AT state initial process for determining the number of games in the second AT state and the effect content to be executed in the second AT state is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S661 or in the processing of step S660, if it is determined that a value other than 0 is set to the second AT state game number counter (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART navigation lottery. The processing is executed (S662). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 59A and 59B) based on the effect game state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination is made. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-page bell role is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the second AT state game number counter (S663). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S664). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous process during the second AT state.

  In the process of step S664, if it is determined that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S665).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus type lottery process during the second AT state, and sets the result of the executed pseudo bonus type lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S666). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special mode set in the special mode storage area and the AT probability state set in the AT probability state storage area to refer to the pseudo AT bonus state in the second AT state. A table (see FIGS. 73 to 82) is determined, and a pseudo bonus type lottery is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state.

  As described above, based on the winning probability set in the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state determined based on the special mode set by the sub CPU 102, whether or not to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state The sub CPU 102 that determines the pseudo-special game state during the specific effect state constitutes lottery means.

  With this configuration, in the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the AT state, a plurality of pseudo bonus lotteries during the second AT state where the winning probabilities that the sub game state is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state are determined. It has a plurality of special modes that are referred to when selecting a table. In particular, when a plurality of special modes that are determined to be shifted to the pseudo bonus state with a high probability are selected, the transition to the pseudo bonus state is performed. Is extremely high, the expectation that the player can win the pseudo bonus state during the AT state can be increased, and the player can concentrate on the game during the AT state. Can be improved.

  Further, as shown in steps S625 and S666, in the first AT state and the second AT state, it is determined by lottery whether or not the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 have been won. The sub CPU 102 performs a third specific effect state lottery unit.

  With this configuration, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo bonus state is won in the AT state, sets the pseudo bonus added state in which the number of sets in the AT state is added every time a pseudo bonus transition symbol is won. Since it is possible to make a transition to the pseudo bonus promotion game state having a possibility of making a transition, the player can be interested in the change in the game state in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S667). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the second AT state executed in step S666.

  In the processing of step S667, if it is determined that one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table to the pseudo bonus type 5 Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the type is the pseudo bonus type 6 (S668). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is 5 or 6 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion game state flag (S669). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion game state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S669 or in the processing of step S668, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. (S670). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus state has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state executed in step S666.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the same color high accuracy counter (S671). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state in the special mode lottery state (S672). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state to the first AT state effect state (S673).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not no continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S674). In this process, when it is determined that the no continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a normal flag in the loop lottery state (S675).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines in the processing of step S674 that the no continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo lottery continuation flag during the second AT state to the loop lottery state. Is set (S676).

  In the processing of steps S674 to S676, when the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo bonus state with the continuation or special continuation set as the AT continuation type, the sub CPU 102 is executed after the end of the pseudo pseudo bonus state that has been won. In step S611 of the first pre-AT state start process (see FIGS. 145 and 146), the continuation or the special continuation is reliably won.

  After executing the processing of step S675 or step S676, the sub CPU 102 turns on the first AT state game number additional lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus (S677). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process at the time of the pseudo bonus during the AT state (S678). In this process, based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area and the special mode set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the AT bonus lottery table during the AT state to be referred during the AT state. 83 (see (a) and (b) in FIG. 84), and the ART random determination is executed with reference to the ART random determination table at the time of the determined pseudo bonus during the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (679). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART random determination at the time of the pseudo bonus in the AT state executed in step S678 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuous game number counter is larger (S680). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuous game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is larger than 0.

  If it is determined in step S680 that the value of the special continuous game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process when the special condition is satisfied (S681). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state from the next game to the precursor state or the pseudo bonus state from the second AT state, that is, the second AT state ends in this game, and the number of special continuation games Since the counter is not 0, it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, and the ART lottery is executed when the special condition is satisfied with reference to the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied (see FIG. 87). In addition, when executing the processing of step S681, the sub CPU 102 executes a special effect, which is a continuous notification mode selected when the special condition is satisfied, and notifies that the AT state is continuously shifted.

  Next, the sub CPU executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S682). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART lottery when the special condition is satisfied in step S681 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  As shown in steps S667 and S680 to S682, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied when the special effect is executed and the sub game state is determined to be shifted to the pseudo bonus state. Thus, the loop rate is determined in accordance with the determined loop rate, and the determined loop rate is stored in a loop reference stock table.

  With this configuration, the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment notifies the player of the pseudo bonus state winning by notifying the continuous notification mode selected when the special condition is satisfied, and Since it is suggested that the state loop rate is newly stored, the player can be interested in the effect mode executed in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  If it is determined in step S667 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter is greater than 0. A determination is made (S683). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high certainty counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the same color high certainty counter ( S684).

  After executing the processing of step S684 or in the processing of step S683, if it is determined that the value stored in the high accuracy counter of the same color is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the same color in the second AT state. The high-accuracy transition lottery process is executed (S685). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and sets the during-AT probability state to be set to the during-AT probability state and the same-color high-accuracy when setting the same-color high probability as the during-AT probability state. The number of games to be executed in a state where the game is performed is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high certainty shift lottery during the second AT state executed in step S685 to the corresponding same color high certainty counter (S686). In this process, if a value has already been stored in the same color high certainty counter, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high certainty transition lottery in the second AT state executed in step S685 to the already stored value. I do.

  After executing the processing of step S682 or step S686, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S687). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (S688).

  In the process of step S688, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state precursor game number random determination process (S689). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes a precursor game number random determination with reference to a probability table (not shown).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number determined in step S689 is larger than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (S690). In this process, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number determined in step S689 is larger than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 The value set in the second AT state game number counter is set in the counter (S691).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S690, if it is determined that the value of the precursor game number determined in step S689 is smaller than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (NO), The CPU 102 sets the value of the precursor game number determined in step S689 in the precursor counter (S692).

  In the processing of steps S690 to S692, if the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state during the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state via a relatively small number of precursor states. I do.

  In the process of step S688, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 displays the BAR symbol in the middle of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning. It is determined whether or not to execute the possible push order navigation (S693). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines by lottery whether or not to execute a push order navigation that can display a BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning, with reference to a probability table (not shown). .

  In the process of step S693, if it is determined that the pressing order navigation is not performed as a result of the lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S694).

  In the processing of step S687, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES), or if it is determined in the processing of step S693 that the pressing order navigation is to be executed as a result of the lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 Initializes the precursor counter (S695).

  After executing the processing of step S691, step S692 or step S695, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S696). ). In this process, if it is determined that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. (S697). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the process during the second AT state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S697 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter (S698), The continuous game number counter is initialized (S699), the state transition common processing at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 139 is executed (S700), and the second AT state processing ends. In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the second AT state game number counter and the special continuation game number since the sub game state becomes any of the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus promotion game state, and the pseudo bonus transition state from the next game. The counter is initialized, and the state transition common process at the time of the end of the precursor is executed.

  If it is determined in step S696 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value set in the second AT state game number counter to 0. It is determined whether or not there is (S701). In this processing, if it is determined that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state end processing (S702). , End the processing during the second AT state. In this process, when the continuation or special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub game state storage area after the end of the second AT state. The AT state end processing is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 is set in the special continuous game number counter. It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S703). In this process, when it is determined that the value set in the special continuous game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S703 that the value set in the special continuous game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the special continuous game number counter (S704). In this process, the sub CPU 102 decrements the special continuation game number counter by 1 since one unit game has been executed with the special continuation set in the AT continuation type storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuous game number counter is 0 (S705). In this process, when it is determined that the value set in the special continuous game number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the value set in the special continuous game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “continue” in the AT continuation type storage area (S706). , End the processing during the second AT state. In this processing, since the value set in the second AT state game number counter is larger than 0 and the value set in the special continuous game number counter becomes 0, the sub CPU 102 Is not established, and the special effect is not executed in the second AT state being executed. Therefore, the continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, and the effect executed in the state where the special continuation is set is ended.

  In the process of step S664, if it is determined that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the precursor process (S707). In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state for executing the promotion lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (S708). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the process during the second AT state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S708 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter (S709), The continuous game number counter is initialized (S710), and the processing during the second AT state is ended. In this processing, the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter and the special continuation game number counter since the sub game state becomes a precursor state after the next game.

<Second AT state initial processing>
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a second AT state initial process executed in step S661 of the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S720). In this process, if it is determined that the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the special continuation special mode transition lottery process (S721), and determines the lottery result. It is set in the special mode storage area (S722).

  In the processing of steps S720 to S722, when the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special continuation special mode shift lottery table (see FIG. 86) and sets the current special mode. A special continuation special mode shift lottery in which there is a possibility that a special mode more advantageous to the player than the special mode set in the storage area is selected, and the result of the lottery is set in the special mode storage area.

  After executing the processing of step S722 or in the processing of step S720, if it is determined that the special continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 randomly selects the second AT state game number. The processing is executed (S723). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the second AT state game number lottery table (FIG. 9) based on the AT continuation type set in the AT continuation type storage area and the special mode set in the special mode storage area. 97, refer to FIG. 102) and determine the second AT state game number which is the number of times the unit game is executed in the second AT state with reference to the determined second AT state game number lottery table. I do.

  As described above, in the second AT state initial process executed when shifting from the first AT state to the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 that determines the number of second AT state games is the second specific effect. The state game frequency determining means is configured.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the second AT state game number determined as a result of the processing of step S723 in the second AT state game number counter (S724). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores the determined number of second AT state games in the second AT state game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S725). In this process, if it is determined that the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a special continuation game number lottery process (S726), and displays the result of the lottery as a special continuation. It is set to the game number counter (S727), and the second AT state initial process is terminated.

  In the processing of steps S725 to S727, when the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 executes the special continuous game number random determination with reference to a probability table (not shown), and the result of the random determination. Is set in the special continuation game number counter, and in the second AT state to be executed from now on, it is determined how many games to perform in the state where the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area. .

  If it is determined in the process of step S725 that the special continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes a special continuation game number counter (S728), and sets the second AT state. The first processing ends.

<Process at end of second AT state>
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the second AT state initial process executed in step S702 of the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT continuation type set in the AT continuation type storage area is a winning or a special winning (S730). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state as a result of the ART loop lottery executed in step S611 of the first AT state pre-start processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146). Then, it is determined whether or not an AT continuation type in which the AT state is continued or a special continuation is won.

  If it is determined in step S730 that no continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 deletes the leading loop rate of the loop reference stock table (S731). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART loop lottery based on the loop rate set at the head of the loop reference stock table in step S611 of the first AT state pre-start processing. Delete the loop rate set at the beginning.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the loop reference set at the head of the loop reference stock table is any of the loop references 1 to 5 (S732). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a loop reference not yet used for the ART loop lottery remains in the loop reference stock table.

  In the process of step S730, if it is determined that the AT continuation type storage area has been won or special winning (YES), or in the process of step S732, one of the loop references 1 to 5 is placed at the top of the loop reference stock table. If it is determined that it is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub game state storage area (S733). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes a continuous transition to set the first AT state in the sub game state storage area to start the first AT state from the next game after the end of the second AT state, After the end of the second AT state, the first AT state is executed, and the AT state can be continued.

  In this way, when the unit game of the second AT state number of games is executed, the sub CPU 102 that continuously shifts the sub game state to the first AT state, thereby continuing the AT state, Is configured.

  Further, in the processing of steps S731 to S733, when a plurality of loop rates are stocked in the loop reference stock table at the start of the second AT state end processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the loop rate is stocked. It is configured to perform continuous migration.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide many benefits to the player when a plurality of loop rates are stored in the loop reference stock table of the sub RAM 103. Interest can be further improved.

  Further, when performing the process of step S733, the sub CPU 102 is configured to execute a continuous notification mode for notifying that the AT state is continuing as the continuous notification mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal state flag to the first AT state effect state (S734). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuous game number counter is larger than 0 (S735).

  If it is determined in step S735 that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process when the special condition is satisfied (S736). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state from the next game to the first AT state from the second AT state, that is, the second AT state ends in the current game, and the special continuous game number counter Is not 0, it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, and the ART random determination is executed when the special condition is satisfied.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (737). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART lottery when the special condition is satisfied in step S736 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  After executing the processing in step S737 or in the processing in step S735, if it is determined that the value set in the special continuous game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 starts the first AT state. The pre-processing is performed (S738), and the second AT state end processing ends. In this processing, before starting the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 determines each piece of control information for determining the contents of the effect to be executed in the first AT state starting from the next game and whether or not the AT state is continued. Execute the process.

  In the process of step S732, when it is determined that none of the loop references 1 to 5 has been set at the head of the loop reference stock table (NO), the sub CPU 102 notifies the continuation of the absence of the AT state. And the common process at the end of the AT state is executed (S739), and the second AT state end process is terminated. In this process, in order to start the normal state from the next game, the sub CPU 102 executes a common process at the end of the AT state for initializing the flags and values stored in the respective storage areas.

  The sub CPU 102 that executes one of a plurality of continuation notification modes for notifying the continuation of the AT state or the non-continuation of the AT state as in the processing of step S681, step S733, and step S739 constitutes a continuation information notification unit. .

<Common processing at the end of AT state>
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing common processing at the time of AT termination performed in step S739 of the second AT state termination processing shown in FIG. 153.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal state in the sub game state storage area (S740). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal state in the sub game state storage area in order to start the normal state from the next game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus counter, the special table number, the special mode table number, the special mode storage area, the special table information counter, and the same color high accuracy counter (S741). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes each flag and value set in the pseudo bonus state and the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal mode lottery table lottery process at the end of the AT (S742). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode lottery table at the end of the AT with reference to the lottery tables (see (a) and (b) in FIGS. 40 and 41) in the normal state starting from the next game. At the end of the AT that determines the table to be executed, the normal mode lottery table lottery is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the AT end normal mode lottery table lottery executed in step S742 in a table stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S743).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal mode number determination process (S744), and sets the normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number (S745). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 39) and determines the normal mode number from the currently set table and the value set in the AT state non-winning number counter. Then, the normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number is set in the normal mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes other high-accuracy transition game number lottery processing (S746), stores the result of the lottery in the corresponding counter (high-precision counter and ultra-high-accuracy counter) (S747), The common processing ends. In this process, in the normal state started from the next game, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the probability state is highly accurate or super accurate from the start of the normal state, and determines whether or not the high-probability transition game number lottery table (not shown). And is determined by lottery.

<Processing during pseudo bonus promotion game state>
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus promotion game state process executed in step S429 of the start command receiving process shown in FIG. 134.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the old sub game state is the pseudo bonus promotion game state (S750). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the old sub game state is the pseudo bonus promotion game state, thereby determining whether the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. I do.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the old sub game state is not the pseudo bonus promotion game state (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets 10 to the pseudo bonus promotion game state game number counter (S751). In this processing, since the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus promotion game state, the sub CPU 102 stores the number of games in the pseudo bonus promotion game state stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 and stores the number of games in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. The game state counter is set to 10 as a predetermined number of games.

  After executing the processing of step S751 or in the processing of step S750, if it is determined that the old sub game state is the pseudo bonus promotion game state (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion game state game number counter to It is determined whether the set value is greater than 0 (S752). In this processing, if it is determined that the value set in the pseudo bonus promotion game state game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the pseudo bonus promotion game state game number counter (S753). ).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S752, if it is determined that the value set in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pressing order bell has been won. A determination is made (S754). In this process, when it is determined that the pressing order bell has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion game state end flag. Here, the pseudo bonus promotion game state end flag is a flag that is referred to in the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 156), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined in step S753, step S755, or step S754 that the push order bell has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the ART navigation lottery process (S756). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 59A and 59B) based on the effect game state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination is made. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-page bell role is executed. In this processing, when the pseudo bonus promotion game state end flag is ON, the sub CPU 102 executes only the pressing order navigation related to the first stop operation among the determined pressing order navigations.

  Next, the sub CPU executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S757). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines each (d) in FIGS. 47 and 48 based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. ), The pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is executed with reference to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, and the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. . Here, since the sub-CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in each (d) of FIGS. 47 and 48, whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion lottery substantially wins the pseudo bonus type 7 is determined. Will be a lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S758). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery has been won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S757.

  In the processing of step S758, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning has not been set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo bonus promotion game state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S758 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes a pseudo bonus promotion game state game number counter (S759). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of pseudo bonus promotion game state games to end the pseudo bonus promotion game state since the pseudo bonus type 7 has been won.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table (S760). In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo bonus type 7, the sub CPU 102 sets the won pseudo bonus type at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S761). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning (S762). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART random determination process with reference to the pseudo bonus ART random determination table during pseudo bonus winning (see FIG. 55).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S763). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART random determination at the time of the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S762 in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus state in the sub game state storage area (S764), and ends the pseudo bonus promotion game state processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state from the pseudo bonus promotion game state to the pseudo bonus state when the pseudo bonus type 7 is won during the pseudo bonus promotion game state processing.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, which is executed in step S411 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 133.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub game state storage area (S770). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition state has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a normal replay which is a pseudo bonus transition combination (S771). . In this process, when it is determined that the normal replay has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S771 that the normal replay has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus start lock has been executed by the main CPU 93 (S772). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a simulation performed when the normal lock is won in the game lock effect executed by the main CPU 93, the first stop operation is performed on the parts other than the left stop button 19L, and no penalty occurs. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the bonus start lock has been executed has been received.

  In the process of step S772, if it is determined that the pseudo-bonus-start lock has not been executed by the main CPU 93 (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the winning operation command receiving process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S772 that the pseudo-bonus start lock has been executed by the main CPU 93 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub game state storage area (S773).

  Through the processing of steps S772 and S773, the sub CPU 102 can notify the player that the pseudo bonus state starts from the next game while the pseudo bonus start lock is being executed. For this reason, the sub CPU 102 operates the start lever 23 even when the player does not recognize that the pseudo bonus state starts from the next game by watching the winning combination and operates the start lever 23 because the pseudo bonus transfer role is not a so-called bonus role. By performing the pseudo bonus start-time lock by the main CPU 93, it is possible to execute an effect for notifying the start of the pseudo bonus state.

  As described above, during the RT1 gaming state, as a plurality of predetermined specific conditions, the pseudo bonus state is won in the state where the pseudo bonus state has been won, and the pseudo bonus start lock is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 102 that shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state constitutes a pseudo special game state shift unit.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned conditions, a plurality of predetermined specific conditions include, in addition to the above-described conditions, winning of the pseudo bonus type 8, and the pseudo bonus in the pseudo bonus promotion game state processing shown in FIG. In the promotion lottery (see step S757), winning in the pseudo bonus type 7 is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area (S774). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets any of the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected by the player in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 that determines which of the plurality of pseudo bonus selection effects prepared in advance has been selected by the player constitutes an effect mode determination unit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect as a selected effect performed during the game in the pseudo bonus state based on the pseudo bonus selection effect set in step S774, so that the selection effect execution is performed. Configure means.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus selection effect set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area is the first pseudo bonus selection effect or the second pseudo bonus selection effect (S775). . In this process, if it is determined that the first pseudo bonus selection effect or the second pseudo bonus selection effect has been set (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the notification timing flag (S776), and sets the notification timing. The lottery process is executed, and the value associated with the lottery result is set in the notification timing counter (S777).

  In the process of step S777, when the first pseudo bonus selection effect is set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first pseudo bonus selection effect based on the loop rate set in the loop rate stock counter. The first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table (see (a) to (c) in FIGS. 103 and 104) is determined, and the determined first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table is referred to. Then, the notification timing lottery is executed.

  In the process of step S777, when the second pseudo bonus selection effect is set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area, the sub CPU 102 determines the second pseudo bonus selection effect based on the set value set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Then, the second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table to be referred to (see each of (a) to (c) in FIGS. 105 and 106) is determined, and the determined second pseudo bonus selection effect notification time is determined. The notification timing lottery is executed with reference to the lottery table.

  In this manner, the sub CPU 102 that determines the timing for executing the AT state notification effect constitutes a winning notification timing determination unit.

  After executing the processing of step S777 or in the processing of step S775, if it is determined that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns off the pseudo bonus shift flag (S778). ), The winning operation command receiving process is terminated.

  In the process of step S770, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus shift state is not set in the sub game state storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion game state in the sub game state storage area. It is determined whether or not there is (S779). In this processing, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion game state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S779 that the pseudo bonus promotion game state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion game state end flag is ON (step S779). S780). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion game state end flag is set.

  In the process of step S780, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion game state end flag is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the winning operation command receiving process. On the other hand, in the process of step S780, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning order is pressed (S781). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R have been pressed in the pressing order for winning the eight-page bell role in the pressed pressing order bell.

  In the process of step S781, if it is determined that the pressing order of the winning combination is not the pressing order to win the eight-bell combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub game state storage area. (S782).

  After executing the processing of step S782 or in the processing of step S781, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the pressing order of the winning combination is the pressing order of winning the eight-bell combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 promotes the pseudo bonus promotion game. The state end flag is turned off (S783), and the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is ended.

  By the processing in the pseudo bonus promotion game state and the processing in steps S781 to S783 shown in FIG. 155, the sub CPU 102 executes the unit game for ten times in which the processing in the pseudo bonus promotion game state ends, and pushes the order as an internal winning combination. When the bell is won and the eight-bell combination cannot be won, an ending condition for ending the pseudo bonus promotion game state is established.

  That is, the sub CPU 102 keeps the player winning the eight-bell role even after executing the ten unit games in which the processing during the pseudo bonus promotion game state is completed, so that the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus promotion game state. Can be continued.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the pseudo-bonus promotion by causing the eight-bell role to be won even when the unit game is executed ten times in the pseudo-bonus promotion game state. Since the gaming state can be continued, the interest in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state can be further improved.

<Special mode suggestion effect>
FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating a special mode suggestion effect executed by the sub CPU 102 at the time of the first AT state and during the transition to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state, and at the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the special mode suggestion effect is that the main CPU 102 performs the first AT state start pre-processing (the first AT state pre-processing) based on the combination of characters displayed in the left character display area 11L and the right character display area 11R of the liquid crystal display device 11. 145 and 146) indicates which special mode is set in the special mode storage area in step S604. Here, the combination of characters displayed in each of the character display areas 11L and 11R is determined with reference to the character combination table shown in FIG.

  For example, when the special mode 2 is set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 displays the character “Saburo” in the left character display area 11L and displays the character “Fukuko” in the right character display area 11R.

  By displaying the character “Saburo” in the left character display area 11L and displaying the character “Fukuko” in the right character display area 11R, the player can enter a special mode 2 as a special mode, a special mode 2 and a special mode. 3, special mode 2, special mode 4, and special mode 2, special mode 3, and special mode 4 can be recognized.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 can indicate the special mode set in the special mode storage area by the combination of the characters displayed in the character display areas 11L and 11R.

  Here, a plurality of special modes, special mode 2 and special mode 3, special mode 2 and special mode 4, special mode 3 and special mode 4, special mode 2, special mode 3 and special mode 4, are special. When set in the mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state, and a special mode suggestion effect executed at the end of the shifted pseudo bonus state, and the end of the shifted pseudo bonus state. The special mode suggestion effect executed during the first AT state executed later is configured to execute a different special mode suggestion effect.

  For example, when the special mode 2 and the special mode 3 are set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state, and indicates the special mode executed at the end of the shifted pseudo bonus state. In the effect, the character "Saburo" is displayed in the left character display area 11L, the character "Fukuko" is displayed in the right character display area 11R, and during the first AT state executed after the end of the shifted pseudo bonus state. In the special mode suggestion effect to be executed, the character "Jiro" is displayed in the left character display area 11L, and the character "Jiko" is displayed in the right character display area 11R.

  With this configuration, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of special modes are set in the special mode storage area, at the end of the pseudo bonus state determined to shift to the AT state, Since the special mode suggestion effect indicating the special mode executed in the execution of the first AT state is different from that in the special AT mode, the player can watch the game until the end of the pseudo bonus state, and at the end of the pseudo bonus state. In the case where the effect suggesting the special mode executed in the execution of the first AT state is different from that in the first AT state, it is determined that a plurality of special modes are selected. Can be improved.

<Special mode announcement>
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a special mode notification effect executed by the sub CPU 102 during the second AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the special mode notification effect, the main CPU 102 uses the symbols displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c of the liquid crystal display device 11 to perform the first AT state pre-start processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146). In step S604), the special mode set in the special mode storage area is notified. Here, the combination of symbols displayed in each of the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c is determined with reference to a symbol combination table shown in FIG.

  For example, when the special mode 2 is set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode notification area 11a to green and displays the symbol “A”.

  When the special mode notification area 11a turns green and the symbol “A” is displayed, the player can recognize that the special mode 2 is selected as the special mode.

  In this manner, the sub CPU 102 can notify the special mode set in the special mode storage area by the combination of the characters displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c.

<Character combination table>
The character combination table shown in FIG. 159 indicates a case where the character combination displayed in each of the character display areas 11L and 11R (see FIG. 157) of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the character combination are displayed in the special mode suggestion effect. Shows a special mode that may be set in the special mode storage area.

  For example, when the character “Jiro” is displayed in the left character display area 11L and the character “Hisako” is displayed in the right character display area 11R, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode associated with “O” in FIG. 3, special mode 2, special mode 3, special mode 3, special mode 4, and special mode 2, special mode 3, and special mode 4 are set in the special mode storage area.

<Symbol combination table>
The symbol combination table shown in FIG. 160 shows the combination of colors and symbols displayed in each of the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c (see FIG. 158) of the liquid crystal display device 1 in the special mode notification effect. The special mode set in the special mode storage area when the special mode is set.

  For example, when the special mode display area 11a turns yellow and the symbol "B" is displayed, the sub CPU 102 sets only the special mode 3 in the special mode storage area as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the ART lottery when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined, and when the ART lottery is not won, the loop rate determined at the time of non-winning. And the number of sets can be carried over until the ART lottery is won. Therefore, when the ART lottery can be finally won, an increase in the loop rate of the game and the number of sets in the AT state can be expected, and the pseudo bonus Even if the AT state is not started after the end of the game in the state, it is possible to keep the player's interest in the game until the ART lottery is won, and to make the player keep the AT state for a long time. The game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, when a plurality of loop rates are stored in the loop reference stock table of the sub RAM 103, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide many benefits to the player, and can provide an interest in the game. Can be further improved.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can substantially control the transition of the gaming state between the RT0 gaming state having a low replay probability and the RT1 gaming state having a high replay probability. The data amount handled by the main control circuit 91 can be reduced, and the load on the main control circuit 91 can be reduced.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts the sub game state to the AT state when the number of non-winnings in the ART lottery becomes a specific number and the shift to the pseudo bonus state is determined. , It is possible to avoid a permanent increase in the loop rate and the number of sets, to suppress unnecessary losses on the game store side, and to allow the player to play a game while maintaining an appropriate gambling spirit Can be.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined and the ART lottery is won, the pachislot machine 1 performs the pseudo bonus selection effect selected before the start of the pseudo bonus state by the player. In the first AT state notification effect as a notification mode based on the above, the fact that the AT win is set in the ART win / fail storage area as the ART win / fail is notified at the announcement timing determined by lottery. From the effect contents notified according to the selected effect and the timing at which the first AT state notification effect is executed, the player can imagine the future development of the game, etc., and can expand the range of strategies for the game. As well as being able to do so, it is possible to increase the interest in game development.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes an effect indicating different game information for each of the first to third pseudo-bonus selection effects selected at the start of the pseudo-bonus state. You can broaden your strategy.

  With this configuration, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is based on the normal mode in which any one of the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables is set from the plurality of normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables. In order to execute the ART lottery based on the selected normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table at the time of selection, the probability of transition to the AT state differs depending on the set normal mode, and the third pseudo bonus selection effect is selected. In this case, the effect indicating the set normal mode is executed at the end of the pseudo bonus state, so that it is possible to easily predict the progress of the game.

  Also, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide a difference in the winning probability in the AT state between the case of the same color transition symbol and the case of the different color transition symbol. .

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of pseudo bonus lottery tables in the second AT state in which the winning probabilities for determining to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state are different. It has a plurality of special modes that are referred to when it is selected. In particular, when a plurality of special modes that are determined to be shifted to the pseudo bonus state with a high probability are selected, the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined. Since the probability of being played is extremely high, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the pseudo bonus state can be won even during the AT state, and to be able to concentrate on the game even during the AT state, and to enhance the interest in the game. Can be done.

  Further, the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment is notified of the winning of the pseudo bonus state by notifying the player of the continuous notification mode selected when the special condition is satisfied, and also in the AT state. Since it is suggested that the loop rate is newly stored, the player can be interested in the effect mode executed in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo bonus state is won in the AT state, the pachislot machine 1 shifts to a pseudo bonus added state in which the number of sets in the AT state is added every time a pseudo bonus transition symbol is won. Since it is possible to shift to the pseudo bonus promotion game state having a possibility, the player can be interested in the change of the game state in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the pseudo bonus promotion game state, even when the transition to the pseudo bonus addition state is not determined, the sub game state is shifted to the first and second pseudo bonus states. Therefore, many benefits can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the pseudo-bonus promotion game state to be achieved by winning eight bells even if the unit game is executed ten times in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. Can be continued, and the interest in the pseudo bonus promotion game state can be further improved.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the AT state, the symbol combination of the replay symbols displayed in the middle section of the reel display window 4 suggests that the transition to the pseudo bonus promotion game state is easy. In addition, the player can be interested in the winning combination in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  With this configuration, the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a special mode suggestion effect indicating the selected special mode in the first AT state, and selects the special mode in the second AT state. Since the special mode notification effect of notifying the special mode is executed, different effects relating to the special mode are executed in the first and second half of one AT state, and the player's expectation for the selected special mode is maintained. be able to.

  With this configuration, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of special modes are set in the special mode storage area, at the end of the pseudo bonus state determined to shift to the AT state, Since the special mode suggestion effect indicating the special mode executed in the execution of the first AT state is different from that in the special AT mode, the player can watch the game until the end of the pseudo bonus state, and at the end of the pseudo bonus state. In the case where the effect suggesting the special mode executed in the execution of the first AT state is different from that in the first AT state, it is determined that a plurality of special modes are selected. Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 102 continuously transitions to the first AT state in the second AT state, at least one character of the character group (ally) is located in the left region in the longitudinal direction. If the display continues until the end of the second AT state and does not continue to the first AT state, at least one character of the character group (enemy) is displayed in the region on the right side in the longitudinal direction. A continuous effect that continues to be displayed until the end of the state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when continuing to the first AT state, at least one of the character groups (enemy) is located in the right region in the longitudinal direction. Are displayed until the end of the second AT state, and the character group (friend) is located in the left area in the longitudinal direction when the state does not continuously shift to the first AT state. At least one of the characters, it may be configured to perform a production which continue to be displayed until the end of the second AT state.

1 Pachislot machines (game machines)
3L, 3C, 3R reel 4 reel display window (symbol display means)
19L, 19C, 19R Stop button 23 Start lever 79 Start switch (start operation detecting means)
80L, 80C, 80R Stop switch (stop operation detecting means)
91 Main Control Circuit 93 Main CPU (Symbol Varying Means, Internal Winning Combination Determination Means, Reel Stop Control Means, Winning Determination Means, Game State Transition Control Means, Set Value Changing Means)
94 Main ROM
95 Main RAM
101 sub-control circuit 102 sub CPU (pseudo special game state transition means, specific effect state transition lottery means, first specific effect state transition means, first specific effect state game frequency determination means, second specific effect state transition means Second specific effect state game number determining means, continuation transition means, continuation probability determining means, continuation number determining means, effect mode determining means, selected effect executing means, winning notification means, winning notification timing determining means, special mode selecting means Pseudo special game state lottery means during the specific effect state, continuation information notifying means, third specific effect state lottery means, third specific effect state transition means, pseudo special game state suggesting means, special mode suggesting effect executing means, special Mode notification effect execution means, special mode suggestion effect execution means when the pseudo special game state ends)
103 Sub RAM (continuation information storage means, non-winning number storage means)

Claims (2)

Symbol display means for displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player;
Symbol changing means for changing the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means,
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. When,
Game state control means for shifting to a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a special game state, as a game state more advantageous to the player among the game states including the normal state ,
The game state control means,
When a specific condition is satisfied, the special game state is shifted to the first specific game state,
When the end condition of the first specific game state is satisfied, the state is always shifted to the second specific game state,
In a case where a predetermined condition different from the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific game state, a transition is made to the first specific game state,
The special game state can be shifted when a special condition is satisfied in the first specific game state and the second specific game state,
Different benefits can be given when the special condition is satisfied in the first specific game state and when the special condition is satisfied in the second specific game state,
In the second specific gaming state, a game machine is configured to notify a result as to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by a battle effect. The game state control means,
The method according to claim 1, wherein when the special game state is shifted from the first specific game state or the second special game state to the special game state, the special game state is changed to the first specific game state. Gaming machine.